You are on page 1of 211

GTX 3X5 Part 27

AML STC Installation Manual

190-00734-20 November 2016 Revision 4


© 2016 Garmin International, Inc., or its subsidiaries
All Rights Reserved
Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted,
disseminated, downloaded or stored in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express prior
written consent of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission to download a single copy of this manual and
of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed and to
print one copy of this manual or of any revision hereto, provided that such electronic or printed copy of this
manual or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright notice and provided further that any
unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited.
© 2016 Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any
use of such marks by Garmin is under license. Other trademarks and tradenames are those of their
respective owners.
Garmin® is a registered trademark of Garmin International or its subsidiaries. Connext™, GDU™, and
GTN™ are trademarks of Garmin International or its subsidiaries. These trademarks may not be used
without the express permission of Garmin.
© 2016 SiriusXM Radio Inc. Sirius, XM, and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM
Radio Inc. All other marks and logos are property of their respective owners. All rights Reserved.
Skywatch® is a registered trademark of L-3 Communications.
Windows® is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
All other product or company names that may be mentioned in this publication are trade names,
trademarks, or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
At Garmin, we value your opinion. For questions or comments about this manual, please reference the
following contact information.
For information regarding the Aviation Limited Warranty, refer to Garmin’s website.
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 E. 151st Street
Olathe, KS 66062 USA
Telephone: (913) 397-8200
Aviation Dealer Technical Support Line (Toll Free): (888) 606-5482
www.garmin.com

Garmin (Europe) Ltd.


Liberty House
Bull Copse Road
Hounsdown Business Park
Southampton, SO40 9LR, UK
Telephone: +44 (0) 23 8052 4000
Fax: 44 +(0) 23 8052 4004
Aviation Support +44 (0) 370 850 1243

Garmin AT, Inc.


2345 Turner Road, SE
Salem, Oregon 97302
Telephone: (503) 581-8101

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page A
RECORD OF REVISIONS
Revision Revision Date Revision Summary
4 11/03/16 Minor updates.
Updated manual to clarify installation limitations and what is
3 11/02/16
required to be filed with rotorcraft permanent records.
2 09/29/16 Minor updates.
1 09/16/16 Initial release.

REVISION 3 CHANGE DESCRIPTION


Section/Page Change Description
2.2 Updated section to clarify installation limitations.
Updated section to clarify what must be documented and filed with rotorcraft
7.5.2
permanent records as part of the Instructions for Continued Airworthiness.

REVISION 4 CHANGE DESCRIPTION


Section/Page Change Description
6.1.3 Added “Flash Message Indicator” configuration settings to table 6-11.
Appendix B Added flagnote 6 to figure B-2.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page B
INFORMATION SUBJECT TO EXPORT CONTROL LAWS
This document may contain information which is subject to the Export Administration Regulations (EAR)
issued by the United States Department of Commerce (15 CFR, Chapter VII, Subchapter C) and which
may not be exported, released, or disclosed to foreign nationals inside or outside of the United States
without first obtaining an export license. A violation of the EAR may be subject to a penalty of up to 10
years imprisonment and a fine of up to $1,000,000 under Section 2410 of the Export Administration Act of
1979. Include this notice with any reproduced portion of this document.
Information in this document can change without notice. Go to Garmin’s website www.garmin.com for
updates and supplemental information about the operation of Garmin units.
DEFINITIONS OF WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES

WARNING
A Warning means that injury or death is possible if the instructions are not
obeyed.

CAUTION
A Caution means that damage to the equipment is possible.

NOTE
A Note provides additional information.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page i
WARNING
This product, its packaging, and its components contain chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer, birth defects, or reproductive harm. This notice is being
provided in accordance with California's Proposition 65. If you have any questions or
would like more information, please refer to our website at
www.garmin.com/prop65.

WARNING
Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply.
Refer to www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

CAUTION
The GTX 335 and GTX 345 have a special anti-reflective coated display that is sensitive to
waxes and abrasive cleaners. Cleaners that have ammonia will cause damage to the anti-
reflective coating. Clean the display with a clean, lint-free cloth and a cleaner that is safe
for anti-reflective coatings.

NOTE
All information depicted in screen shots, such as software file names, versions, and part
numbers, is subject to change and may not be up to date.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Introduction ...............................................................................................................................1-2
1.2 Terminology ..............................................................................................................................1-2
1.3 STC Applicability ......................................................................................................................1-4
1.4 System Overview .......................................................................................................................1-6
1.5 System Installation ..................................................................................................................1-17
1.6 Antennas ..................................................................................................................................1-21
1.7 Technical Specifications ..........................................................................................................1-22
1.8 Reference Documentation .......................................................................................................1-23
1.9 STC Permission .......................................................................................................................1-24
2 LIMITATIONS .................................................................................................................................2-1
2.1 Operational Limitations .............................................................................................................2-1
2.2 Installation Limitations ..............................................................................................................2-2
3 INSTALLATION OVERVIEW ......................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Installation Considerations ........................................................................................................3-2
3.2 Installation Materials .................................................................................................................3-2
3.3 Tools and Equipment .................................................................................................................3-4
3.4 Minimum System Configuration ...............................................................................................3-5
3.5 Wireless Interface to PED (GTX 345/345R Only) ....................................................................3-6
3.6 External Devices and Sensors ...................................................................................................3-8
3.7 Traffic Annunciator and Switches ...........................................................................................3-12
3.8 Circuit Protection .....................................................................................................................3-13
3.9 Placards and Labels .................................................................................................................3-13
3.10 Cooling ....................................................................................................................................3-13
3.11 Antennas ..................................................................................................................................3-14
3.12 Standard Practices ...................................................................................................................3-21
3.13 Electrical Load Analysis ..........................................................................................................3-27
4 INSTALLATION ..............................................................................................................................4-1
4.1 GTX 3X5 Unit Installation ........................................................................................................4-1
4.2 Electrical Installation .................................................................................................................4-7
4.3 Weight and Balance .................................................................................................................4-11
4.4 RFMS Completion ...................................................................................................................4-12
5 SOFTWARE UPDATE ....................................................................................................................5-1
5.1 Software Check .........................................................................................................................5-2
5.2 GTX 3X5/3X5R Software Update ............................................................................................5-3
6 CONFIGURATION ..........................................................................................................................6-1
6.1 Panel Mounted GTX 3X5 ..........................................................................................................6-3
6.2 Remote GTX 3X5 ....................................................................................................................6-24
6.3 GTX 3X5 with GTN 6XX/7XX ..............................................................................................6-33
6.4 GTX 3X5 With GNS 400W/500W .........................................................................................6-35
7 OPERATION AND PERFORMANCE CHECKOUT ..................................................................7-1
7.1 Interfaces (Configuration Mode) ...............................................................................................7-2
7.2 Interfaces (Normal Mode) .........................................................................................................7-4

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 iii
TABLE OF CONTENTS CONTINUED
7.3 Performance ...............................................................................................................................7-9
7.4 GPS Antenna Performance ......................................................................................................7-13
7.5 Documentation ........................................................................................................................7-15
8 CONNECTOR PINOUT ..................................................................................................................8-1
8.1 GTX 3X5 ...................................................................................................................................8-1
APPENDIX A INSTALLATION DRAWING .....................................................................................A-1
APPENDIX B INTERCONNECT DRAWINGS ................................................................................. B-1
APPENDIX C EQUIPMENT COMPATIBILITY AND CONFIGURATION ................................C-1
C.1 Remote Control ........................................................................................................................ C-2
C.2 GPS Source ............................................................................................................................... C-2
C.3 Altitude Source ......................................................................................................................... C-3
C.4 Radar Altimeters ....................................................................................................................... C-6
C.5 Heading Source ........................................................................................................................ C-7
C.6 Audio Panels ............................................................................................................................. C-9
C.7 Traffic and Weather Display .................................................................................................. C-10
C.8 Traffic Sensors (GTX 345 Only) ............................................................................................ C-12
C.9 Bluetooth ................................................................................................................................ C-12
APPENDIX D ANTENNA LOCATIONS ............................................................................................D-1

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 iv
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1-1 GTX 335/335R Interfaces ....................................................................................................1-9
Figure 1-2 GTX 345/345R Interfaces ..................................................................................................1-11
Figure 1-3 GTN 6XX Transponder Control ........................................................................................1-12
Figure 1-4 GTN 7XX Transponder Control ........................................................................................1-12
Figure 1-5 GTX 335/345 Front Panel ..................................................................................................1-12
Figure 1-6 Garmin Altitude Encoder ...................................................................................................1-16
Figure 3-1 Test Harness for Bluetooth Verification ..............................................................................3-6
Figure 3-2 Electrical Bond Preparation - Nut Plate .............................................................................3-24
Figure 3-3 Electrical Bond Preparation - Bolt/Nut Joint .....................................................................3-24
Figure 3-4 Electrical Bond Preparation - Terminal Lug ......................................................................3-24
Figure 3-5 Transponder Antenna Ground Plane ..................................................................................3-26
Figure 3-6 GPS/SBAS Antenna Ground Plane ....................................................................................3-26
Figure 3-7 Ammeter Placement for Current Measurements ................................................................3-29
Figure 3-8 GTX Electrical Load Tabulation Form ..............................................................................3-30
Figure 3-9 GTX Electrical Load Tabulation Form (Sample) ..............................................................3-32
Figure 3-10 Battery Capacity Analysis Example ..................................................................................3-34
Figure 4-1 Configuration Module Assembly .........................................................................................4-4
Figure 4-2 Backplate Assembly P/N 011-02976-01 ..............................................................................4-5
Figure 4-3 Backplate Assembly P/N 011-02976-11 ..............................................................................4-6
Figure 4-4 Shielded Wire Preparation ...................................................................................................4-9
Figure 4-5 GTX 3X5 Connector Kits ..................................................................................................4-10
Figure 5-1 GTX 3X5 Start-Up Screen ...................................................................................................5-2
Figure 5-2 GTX 3X5 Product Data Page ...............................................................................................5-2
Figure 5-3 GTN 6XX/7XX System Page ..............................................................................................5-2
Figure 5-4 GTX 3X5 Install Tool Software Upload Page .....................................................................5-4
Figure 6-1 Audio Page 1....................................................................................................................... 6-3
Figure 6-2 Audio Page 2 ........................................................................................................................6-3
Figure 6-3 Audio Page 3 ........................................................................................................................6-3
Figure 6-4 RS-232 Interface Page .........................................................................................................6-5
Figure 6-5 RS-422 Output Page .............................................................................................................6-6
Figure 6-6 A429 In Page ........................................................................................................................6-7
Figure 6-7 A429 Output Page ................................................................................................................6-8
Figure 6-8 HSDB Interface Page ...........................................................................................................6-9
Figure 6-9 Discrete In Page ...................................................................................................................6-9
Figure 6-10 Discrete Out Page ...............................................................................................................6-11
Figure 6-11 Unit Page ............................................................................................................................6-12
Figure 6-12 Display Pages .....................................................................................................................6-13
Figure 6-13 Sensor Page ........................................................................................................................6-15
Figure 6-14 Internal Alt Encoder Page ..................................................................................................6-18
Figure 6-15 Internal Alt Encoder Adjustment Page ..............................................................................6-19
Figure 6-16 Diagnostics Page ................................................................................................................6-23
Figure 6-17 USB-A and USB-B Connectors .........................................................................................6-24
Figure 6-18 Audio Configuration Page .................................................................................................6-25
Figure 6-19 Interface Configuration Page (Serial) ................................................................................6-26
Figure 6-20 Interface Configuration Page (A429) .................................................................................6-26
Figure 6-21 Interface Configuration Page (Discretes) ...........................................................................6-27
Figure 6-22 Interface Configuration Page (HSDB) ...............................................................................6-27
Figure 6-23 Unit Configuration Page ....................................................................................................6-28

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 v
LIST OF FIGURES CONTINUED
Figure 6-24 Display Configuration Page ...............................................................................................6-29
Figure 6-25 Sensor Configuration Page (Garmin Altitude Encoder) ....................................................6-30
Figure 6-26 Sensor Configuration Page (GPS) ......................................................................................6-30
Figure 6-27 Sensor Configuration Page (Additional Sensors) ..............................................................6-31
Figure 6-28 Airframe Configuration Page .............................................................................................6-32
Figure 6-29 Aircraft Configuration Page ...............................................................................................6-33
Figure 6-30 Main RS-232 Config Page .................................................................................................6-35
Figure 7-1 EMC Form Example ..........................................................................................................7-12
Figure 8-1 Connector J3251 Rear View ................................................................................................8-2
Figure 8-2 Connector J3252 Rear View ................................................................................................8-5
Figure A-1 Option 1 GTX 3X5 Rack Installation, Rotorcraft Console/Instrument Panel Support .......A-2
Figure A-2 Option 2 GTX 3X5 Rack Installation, Rotorcraft Instrument Panel ...................................A-4
Figure A-3 Option 3 GTX 3X5 Remote Installation, Vertical Mount, Existing Sheet Metal
Equipment Shelf ..................................................................................................................A-6
Figure A-4 Option 4 GTX 3X5 Remote Installation, Vertical Mount, Existing Sandwich Panel
Equipment Shelf [Conductive] ............................................................................................A-7
Figure A-5 Option 4 GTX 3X5 Grounding, Remote Installation, Vertical Mount, Existing
Equipment Shelf [Non-Conductive] ...................................................................................A-8
Figure A-6 Standard Kit, GTX 3X5 Transponder Panel Mounted ........................................................A-9
Figure A-7 Dimensions Standard Kit, GTX 3X5 Transponder, Panel Mounted .................................A-10
Figure A-8 Standard Kit, GTX 3X5 Remote Transponder Horizontal Mount ....................................A-11
Figure A-9 Dimensions Standard Kit, GTX 3X5 Remote Transponder, Horizontal Mount ...............A-12
Figure A-10 Standard Kit, GTX 3X5 Remote Transponder Vertical Mount ........................................A-13
Figure A-11 Dimensions Standard Kit, GTX 3X5 Remote Transponder, Vertical Mount ...................A-14
Figure B-1 GTX 3X5 - Power, Ground, and Configuration Module Interconnect ............................... B-3
Figure B-2 GTX 3X5 Switches ............................................................................................................. B-5
Figure B-3 GTX 335 - GNS 400W/500W Series Interconnect ............................................................. B-6
Figure B-4 GTX 335 and GTX 345 - Single GNS 400W/500W Series Interconnect .......................... B-7
Figure B-5 GTX 345 - GNS 400W/500W Series Interconnect ............................................................. B-8
Figure B-6 GTX 335 - GTN 6XX/7XX Interconnect ......................................................................... B-10
Figure B-7 Single/Dual GTX 335 - Single GTN 6XX/7XX Interconnect .......................................... B-11
Figure B-8 GTX 345 - GTN 6XX/7XX Interconnect ......................................................................... B-12
Figure B-9 GTX 345 - Single/Dual GTN 6XX/7XX Interconnect ..................................................... B-14
Figure B-10 GTX 345 and GTX 335 - Single GTN 6XX/7XX ............................................................ B-16
Figure B-11 GTX 335 - GDU 620 TIS-A Display Interconnect ........................................................... B-17
Figure B-12 GTX 345 - GDU 620 Interconnect ................................................................................... B-17
Figure B-13 GTX 3X5 - Altitude Data Source Interconnect ................................................................ B-18
Figure B-14 GTX 3X5 - AHRS Heading Data Source Interconnect .................................................... B-20
Figure B-15 GTX 3X5 - Audio Interconnect ........................................................................................ B-21
Figure B-16 GTX 335/335R - Traffic System Interconnect ................................................................. B-22
Figure B-17 GTX 345/345R - Traffic System Interconnect ................................................................. B-23
Figure B-18 GTX 3X5 - Radio Altimeter Interconnect ........................................................................ B-25
Figure B-19 GTX 3X5 Providing GPS to GTX 3XX Interconnect ...................................................... B-26
Figure B-20 External Traffic Annunciator ............................................................................................ B-27
Figure D-1 Airbus AS350 GPS Antenna Location ................................................................................D-2
Figure D-2 August A109 GPS Antenna Location .................................................................................D-3
Figure D-3 Bell 206B GPS Antenna Location ......................................................................................D-4
Figure D-4 Enstrom 280 GPS Antenna Location ..................................................................................D-5

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 vi
LIST OF FIGURES CONTINUED
Figure D-5 Enstrom 480 GPS Antenna Location ..................................................................................D-6
Figure D-6 Robinson R22 GPS Antenna Location ................................................................................D-7
Figure D-7 Robinson R44 GPS Antenna Location ................................................................................D-8
Figure D-8 Robinson R66 GPS Antenna Location ................................................................................D-9

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 vii
LIST OF TABLES
Table 1-1 GTX 3X5/3X5R Unit List ....................................................................................................1-5
Table 1-2 GTX Interfaces .....................................................................................................................1-7
Table 1-3 GTX 3X5 Installation Eligibility Checklist .......................................................................1-17
Table 1-4 Electrical Load ...................................................................................................................1-22
Table 1-5 Garmin Documents ............................................................................................................1-23
Table 1-6 Federal Aviation Administration Documents ....................................................................1-24
Table 1-7 Industry Standards ..............................................................................................................1-24
Table 3-1 GTX 3X5 Connector Kit Options ........................................................................................3-2
Table 3-2 GTX 3X5 Backplate Assembly Options ..............................................................................3-2
Table 3-3 GTX 3X5 Mount Rack Options ...........................................................................................3-2
Table 3-4 GTX 3X5 Configuration Module .........................................................................................3-2
Table 3-5 Optional Supplies .................................................................................................................3-2
Table 3-6 Permitted Installation Ethernet Cable P/Ns .........................................................................3-3
Table 3-7 Annunciators ........................................................................................................................3-3
Table 3-8 Recommended Crimping Tools ...........................................................................................3-4
Table 3-9 Bluetooth Reception Verification Check .............................................................................3-7
Table 3-10 Approved Control and Display Sources ...............................................................................3-8
Table 3-11 Altitude Source Options .......................................................................................................3-9
Table 3-12 Pressure Altitude Source Priority .........................................................................................3-9
Table 3-13 Heading Source Options ....................................................................................................3-10
Table 3-14 Multiple Heading Source Priority ......................................................................................3-10
Table 3-15 Radar Altimeter Priority List .............................................................................................3-11
Table 3-16 Version 2 Compliance with Installation of Multiple ADS-B Out Equipment ...................3-12
Table 3-17 Approved UAT/1090 Antennas .........................................................................................3-15
Table 3-18 Maximum Antenna-to-Transponder Separation ................................................................3-15
Table 3-19 Coaxial Cable Specifications .............................................................................................3-16
Table 3-20 Typical Cable Connector Loss ...........................................................................................3-16
Table 3-21 GTX 3X5 GPS Antennas ...................................................................................................3-18
Table 3-22 GPS Antenna Position Source Check Parameters ..............................................................3-19
Table 3-23 GPS dB Loss Allowance ....................................................................................................3-19
Table 3-24 Helicopter Models Requiring a Flight Check ....................................................................3-20
Table 3-25 Ground Plane Definitions and Ground Path Resistance Requirements ............................3-24
Table 4-1 Garmin Altitude Encoder Kit, P/N 011-03080-00 ...............................................................4-3
Table 4-2 Configuration Module Kit, P/N 011-00979-03 ....................................................................4-4
Table 4-3 Standard Mount Backplate Assembly ..................................................................................4-5
Table 4-4 Vertical Mount Backplate Assembly ...................................................................................4-6
Table 4-5 Shield Wire Assembly ........................................................................................................4-8
Table 4-6 GTX 3X5 Connector Kit Hardware ...................................................................................4-10
Table 4-7 Example Weight and Balance Calculation .........................................................................4-11
Table 6-1 Panel Mount Audio Settings [2] ...........................................................................................6-4
Table 6-2 Panel Mount Altitude and Timer Expired Alert Settings [1] ...............................................6-4
Table 6-3 Panel Mount Traffic Alert Settings [1] ................................................................................6-4
Table 6-4 RS-232 Channel Selections ..................................................................................................6-5
Table 6-5 RS-422 Output Selections ....................................................................................................6-6
Table 6-6 ARINC 429 Inputs ...............................................................................................................6-7
Table 6-7 ARINC 429 Outputs .............................................................................................................6-8
Table 6-8 HSDB Formats .....................................................................................................................6-9
Table 6-9 Discrete Input Configuration .............................................................................................6-10

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 viii
LIST OF TABLES CONTINUED
Table 6-10 Discrete Output Configuration ...........................................................................................6-11
Table 6-11 Panel Mount Unit Settings [2] ...........................................................................................6-12
Table 6-12 Panel Mount Display Settings ............................................................................................6-13
Table 6-13 Panel Mount Altitude Source Settings ...............................................................................6-15
Table 6-14 Panel Mount GPS Source ...................................................................................................6-16
Table 6-15 Panel Mount Alt Encoder Settings .....................................................................................6-18
Table 6-16 Panel Mount ADS-B Settings ............................................................................................6-20
Table 6-17 Panel Mount Aircraft Settings ............................................................................................6-22
Table 6-18 RS-232 Input/Output Configuration ..................................................................................6-34
Table 6-19 RS-232 Input/Output Configuration ..................................................................................6-35
Table 6-20 ARINC 429 Output Configuration .....................................................................................6-35
Table 8-1 GTX 3X5 J3251 Pin Assignments .......................................................................................8-2
Table 8-2 GTX 345 J3252 Pin Assignments ........................................................................................8-5
Table 8-3 Lighting/Power Pin Assignments .........................................................................................8-6
Table 8-4 GTX 3X5 Power Control Inputs ..........................................................................................8-7
Table 8-5 GTX 3X5 Encoded Altitude Inputs .....................................................................................8-7
Table 8-6 GTX 3X5 Discrete Outputs ..................................................................................................8-8
Table 8-7 GTX 3X5 Configurable Discrete Output Pins .....................................................................8-8
Table 8-8 GTX 3X5 Discrete Inputs ....................................................................................................8-9
Table 8-9 GTX 3X5 Configurable Discrete Input Pins ........................................................................8-9
Table A-1 Bill of Material ....................................................................................................................A-1
Table A-2 Part Numbers [Panel Mounted Unit] ..................................................................................A-9
Table A-3 Weight and Center of Gravity ...........................................................................................A-10
Table A-4 Part Numbers [Remote Unit] ............................................................................................A-11
Table A-5 Weight and Center of Gravity ...........................................................................................A-12
Table A-6 Part Numbers [Remote Unit, Vertical Mount] ..................................................................A-13
Table A-7 Weight and Center of Gravity ...........................................................................................A-14
Table C-1 Interface Summary .............................................................................................................. C-1
Table C-2 Remote Control ................................................................................................................... C-2
Table C-3 GPS Source ......................................................................................................................... C-2
Table C-4 Altitude Sources .................................................................................................................. C-4
Table C-5 Radar Altimeters ................................................................................................................. C-6
Table C-6 Heading Source ................................................................................................................... C-7
Table C-7 Audio Panels ....................................................................................................................... C-9
Table C-8 Traffic and Weather Display - GTX 345 .......................................................................... C-10
Table C-9 Traffic Only Display - GTX 335 ....................................................................................... C-11
Table C-10 Traffic Sensors (GTX 345 Only) ...................................................................................... C-12
Table C-11 Bluetooth ........................................................................................................................... C-12

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 ix
1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1.1 Introduction.......................................................................................................................................1-2
1.2 Terminology......................................................................................................................................1-2
1.3 STC Applicability .............................................................................................................................1-4
1.4 System Overview..............................................................................................................................1-6
1.4.1 GTX Interface Summary ............................................................................................................1-6
1.4.2 GTX 335/335R ...........................................................................................................................1-8
1.4.3 GTX 345/345R .........................................................................................................................1-10
1.4.4 Garmin Altitude Encoder .........................................................................................................1-16
1.5 System Installation..........................................................................................................................1-17
1.5.1 Pre-Installation Checklist .........................................................................................................1-17
1.5.2 Altitude Input ...........................................................................................................................1-18
1.5.3 GPS Position Source ................................................................................................................1-19
1.5.4 Mutual Suppression Bus...........................................................................................................1-19
1.5.5 Air/Ground Determination .......................................................................................................1-19
1.5.6 Aircraft Heading Input (Optional)............................................................................................1-20
1.5.7 Radar Altimeter Input (Optional) .............................................................................................1-20
1.5.8 External Traffic System (Optional GTX 345/345R Only).......................................................1-20
1.5.9 No Display Traffic Alerting (Optional GTX 345 Only) ..........................................................1-20
1.5.10 External Sensors, Devices, and Interfaces ...............................................................................1-20
1.6 Antennas .........................................................................................................................................1-21
1.6.1 Transponder Antenna Requirements ........................................................................................1-21
1.6.2 GPS Antenna Requirements (GTX 3X5 with SBAS/GPS Only) ............................................1-21
1.7 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................................1-22
1.7.1 Power Requirements ................................................................................................................1-22
1.7.2 EQF ..........................................................................................................................................1-22
1.8 Reference Documentation...............................................................................................................1-23
1.9 STC Permission ..............................................................................................................................1-24

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 1-1
1.1 Introduction
This manual presents instructions, and defines conditions and limitations for installation and approval of
the Garmin GTX 335/335R/345/345R series transponders, including physical, mechanical, and electrical
requirements.
Refer to GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Equipment List for required hardware and software configuration.
1.2 Terminology
Unless specified differently, references made to GTX 3X5 is applicable to the GTX 335/335R/345/345R
transponder system families. ADS-B refers to ADS-B Out and ADS-B In, ADS-B Out refers to Version 2
ADS-B Out only.
ADS-B In refers to TIS-B traffic and FIS-B weather received from ground stations over UAT and ADS-B
and ADS-R traffic targets received directly over 1090 MHz or 978 MHz (UAT). ADS-B Out is the
transmission of ownship position, altitude, velocity, and other information to other aircraft and ATC
ground based surveillance systems.
The term squitter refers to a burst or broadcast of data that is transmitted periodically by a Mode S
transponder without interrogation.
Abbreviations used in this manual are:
AC Advisory Circular
ADC Air Data Computer
ADLP Airborne Data Link Processor
ADS-B Automatic Dependent Surveillance - Broadcast
ADS-R Automatic Dependent Surveillance - Rebroadcast
AHRS Attitude Heading Reference System
AML Approved Model List
ATC Air Traffic Control
ATCRBS Air Traffic Control Radar Beacon System
CFR Code of Federal Regulations
CSA Conflict Situational Awareness
EFIS Electronic Flight Instrument System
EGNOS European Geostationary Navigation Overlay Service
EHS Enhanced Surveillance
ELA Electrical Load Analysis
ELT Emergency Locator Transmitter
EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility
EMI Electromagnetic Interference
ES Extended Squitter
EQF Environmental Qualification Form
FAA Federal Aviation Administration
FADEC Full Authority Digital Engine Control
FCC Federal Communications Commission
FIS-B Flight Information Services - Broadcast
GAE Garmin Altitude Encoder
GDU Garmin Display Unit
GNS Garmin Navigation System
GNSS Global Navigation Satellite System
GPS Global Positioning System
GTN Garmin Touch Navigator

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 1-2
GTX Garmin Transponder
HAT Height Above Terrain
HIRF High Intensity Radio Field
HSDB High Speed Data Bus
IEL Indirect Effects of Lightning
IM Installation Manual
LRU Line Replaceable Unit
MM Maintenance Manual
OAT Outside Air Temperature
OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer
PED Portable Electronic Device
POH Pilot Operating Handbook
RF Radio Frequency
RFM Rotorcraft Flight Manual
RFMS Rotorcraft Flight Manual Supplement
RTCA Radio Technical Commission for Aeronautics
SBAS Satellite Based Augmentation Systems
SPI Special Position Identification
SRM Structural Repair Manual
STC Supplemental Type Certificate
TAS Traffic Advisory System
TC Type Certificate
TCAS Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System
TIS Traffic Information Service
TSO Technical Standard Order
UAT Universal Access Transceiver
USB Universal Serial Bus
VFR Visual Flight Rules
VSWR Voltage Standing Wave Ratio
WAAS Wide Area Augmentation System

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 1-3
1.3 STC Applicability
This manual defines modifications needed to install the Garmin GTX 3X5 system with ADS-B Out and
ADS-B In (GTX 345 only) functionality under STC SR02124SE. The scope of the modifications includes
replacement of a Garmin GTX 33X with a Garmin GTX 3X5, or replacement of a non-Garmin transponder
with an ADS-B compliant Garmin GTX 3X5 transponder.
Rotorcraft makes and models listed on the AML are eligible for the GTX 3X5 installation under this STC.
Based on the data contained in the manual, STC applicability to a particular rotorcraft must be verified
before the rotorcraft is modified. Some rotorcraft may have been modified or equipped with systems to
which the GTX interface is not defined nor approved.
Rotorcraft modification per STC SR02124SE includes installation of the equipment shown in table 1-1.
Equipment interfaces approved by this STC are detailed in appendix C.
Installation and operational use of the GTX 3X5 with systems other than those identified in this manual
requires separate approval which can be accomplished through a field approval, STC, or TC. AC 20-138( )
provides guidance on submittal of applications for installation and operational approval, AC 21-40( )
advises on STC approval procedure, and AC 43-210 contains guidance on field approval procedure.
STC SR02124SE does not provide airworthiness approval for installation of the GTX 3X5 system in Part
27 rotorcraft not listed on the AML, or Part 29 rotorcraft. NVIS evaluation and certification is outside the
scope of this STC and must be coordinated separately when GTX NV unit(s) are installed. Display aspects
of GTX NV will affect prior approval of the NVIS installation.
Part 27 rotorcraft not listed on the AML can be added to the list through a revision of the STC. Interested
parties must contact Garmin technical support and submit installation data. Until then, rotorcraft models
not listed on the AML require separate airworthiness approval of the GTX installation.
This STC is not applicable to Part 23/25 airplanes. Refer to STC SA01714WI for aircraft certified under 14
CFR Part 23.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 1-4
Table 1-1 GTX 3X5/3X5R Unit List
Unit Description P/N
Black front, panel mounted, extended squitter w/o
GTX 335 011-03300-00
internal GPS source
Black front, panel mounted, extended squitter w/o
GTX 335 NV 011-03300-20
internal GPS source, night vision compatible
Black front, panel mounted, extended squitter with
GTX 335 GPS 011-03300-40
internal GPS source
Remote mounted, extended squitter w/o internal GPS
GTX 335R 011-03301-00
source
Remote mounted, extended squitter with internal GPS
GTX 335R GPS 011-03301-40
source
Black front, panel mounted, extended squitter w/o
GTX 345 011-03302-00
internal GPS source
Black front, panel mounted, extended squitter with
GTX 345 GPS 011-03302-40
internal GPS source
Remote mounted, extended squitter w/o internal GPS
GTX 345R 011-03303-00
source
Remote mounted, extended squitter with internal GPS
GTX 345R GPS 011-03303-40
source

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 1-5
1.4 System Overview
The GTX 3X5 transponders approved for installation by this STC are the panel and remote mount GTX
335 and GTX 345 models. The remote mount models are identified with an R appended to the model name
(i.e., GTX 335R and GTX 345R).
All GTX 3X5 series transponders approved for installation by this STC are TSO-C112e (Level 2els,
Class 1) compliant Mode S transponders with TSO-C166b compliant ADS-B Out Extended Squitter
functionality. The Mode S transponder is interoperable with both ground based RADAR and airborne
TCAS systems. It operates on the 1030 MHz and 1090 MHz frequencies for interrogations and replies,
respectively. The ADS-B Out Extended Squitter automatically transmits every second in support of air
traffic control operations and airborne ADS-B In Traffic Systems. The GTX 345/345R will provide all
traffic aural alerts when interfaced with a TAS/TCAS system.
1.4.1 GTX Interface Summary
The GTX units utilize ARINC 429, RS-232, discrete inputs, and discrete outputs to transmit and receive
data with other aircraft LRUs and systems. The GTX 345 adds HSDB interfaces. GTX interfaces are
shown in table 1-2. For interconnect information, refer to appendix B.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 1-6
Table 1-2 GTX Interfaces
GTX 335/335R GTX 345/345R
Interface Description Input/Output
Qty Qty
RS-232 In/Out 3 4
In 2 2
ARINC 429
Out 1 1
Gillham Gray Code altitude input In 1 1
OAT probe [5] In 1 1
Analog audio output Out 1 1
In 6 [4] 6 [4]
Discrete Out 1 1
In/Out [1] 2 4
Suppression bus In/Out 1 1
Configuration/pressure sensor
In/Out [2] 1 1
module interface
USB data port In/Out 1 1
Lighting bus In [3] 1 1
Switched power output Out 1 1
Time Mark In/Out 1 1
HSDB In/Out - 2
RS-422 Out - 1

[1] Configurable to be an input or output on a per-discrete basis.


[2] Can interface to a configuration module or a combination configuration/pressure sensor
module.
[3] Panel mounted units only.
[4] If the Gillham Gray Code is not used, these pins can be used as additional discrete inputs.
[5] This is not covered under this STC.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 1-7
1.4.2 GTX 335/335R
The GTX 335/335R units have Mode S with ADS-B Out extended squitter capability, and are panel or
remote mounted. The panel mounted units contain an integrated display while the remote mounted unit
requires an interface to a control source for normal operation and functionality. Continuous battery power
from the unswitchable battery bus is optional for the GTX 335/335R models with GPS /SBAS receivers to
maintain the internal GPS clock and decrease initial GPS satellite acquisition time during system power
up. The transponder provides an ADS-B Out failure message to alert the crew that the unit has a degraded
ADS-B system.
GTX 335/335R features:
 Mode S transponder, mode 3/A squawk code, flight ID, and IDENT controls
 ADS-B Out capability: position, altitude, velocity, heading, and other required data
 Optional internal ADS-B compliant GNSS receiver
 Optional TSO-C88b compliant GAE pressure sensor module
 Entry of squawk code and flight ID
 Squawk code and flight ID
 Pressure altitude
 Static air temp
 Density altitude
 Timers: count up, count down, flight, trip
 Audio output
 TIS traffic display output to a compatible display and aural alerting
 Altitude deviation alerting
GTX 335/335R units interface through:
 ARINC 429
 RS-232
 Gray code
 Discrete I/O

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 1-8
O p tio n a l In te rfa c e s R e q u ire d In te rfa c e s

A u d io P a n e l
B o tto m A n te n n a
H e a d in g S o u rce

T ra ffic S y s te m G T X 3 X 5 w ith G P S o n ly
F o r X P D R c ro s s-ta lk G P S A n te n n a
OR
S e c o n d a ry G P S
G P S S o u rce
T e m p e ra tu re

E x te rn a l Id e n t
A ltitu d e S o u rc e
OR
E xte rn a l S ta n d b y G T X 3 3 5 /3 3 5 R G a rm in A ltitu d e
E ncoder
A ir D a ta S o u rc e

A irc ra ft B a tte ry
P o w e r/G ro u n d
K e e p A liv e in p u t fro m a irc ra ft b a tte ry G TX 335R
s o u rc e fo r in te rn a l G P S o n ly C o n tro l

C o lle ctiv e S w itc h


R e q u ire d if H A T is OR
N o t A v a ila b le
R a d a r A ltitu d e
S o u rc e

Legend

New LRU E x is tin g L R U

Figure 1-1 GTX 335/335R Interfaces

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 1-9
1.4.3 GTX 345/345R
The GTX 345/345R units have Mode S with ADS-B Out extended squitter, UAT, and 1090 receivers for
ADS-B In capabilities, and are panel or remote mounted. The panel mounted units have an integrated
display while the remote mounted unit requires an interface to a control source for normal operation and
functionality. Continuous battery power from the unswitchable battery bus is optional for the
GTX 345/345R models with SBAS/GPS receivers to maintain the internal GPS clock and decrease initial
GPS satellite acquisition time during system power-up. The transponder provides an ADS-B failure
message to alert the crew that the unit has a degraded ADS-B (In or Out) system.
GTX 345/345R features:
 Mode S transponder, mode 3/A squawk code, flight ID, and IDENT controls
 ADS-B Out capability: position, altitude, velocity, heading, and other required data
 Dual-band (UAT/978 MHz and 1090 MHz) ADS-B In receiver
 Optional internal ADS-B compliant GNSS receiver
 Optional TSO-C88b compliant GAE pressure sensor module
 Entry of squawk code and flight ID
 Squawk code and flight ID
 Pressure altitude
 Static air temp
 Density altitude
 Timers: count up, count down, flight, trip
 Audio output
 Connect PED interface to traffic and weather, through Bluetooth
 Altitude deviation alerting
 ADS-B In traffic display output, when connected to a suitable display
 ADS-B In traffic aural alerting
 FIS-B weather and flight information display output
GTX 345/345R units interface through:
 HSDB
 ARINC 429
 RS-232
 RS-422
 Gray code
 Discrete I/O

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 1-10
Optional Interfaces Required Interfaces
Audio Panel

Heading Source Bottom Antenna

Secondary GPS
GTX 3X5 with GPS only
GPS Antenna
Temperature OR

External Ident GPS Source

External Standby

Air Data Source


Altitude Source
GTX 345/345R OR
Aircraft Battery Garmin Altitude
Keep Alive input from aircraft battery Encoder
source for internal GPS only

Power/Ground
Bluetooth Bluetooth
Device GTX 345R
Control
ADS-B Traffic
FIS-B Display
TAS/TCAS I
Traffic Sensor Collective Switch
External Traffic For NO display Install Required if HAT is OR
Annunciator Not Available
Radar Altitude
Source

Legend

New LRU Existing LRU

Figure 1-2 GTX 345/345R Interfaces

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 1-11
The GTX 3X5 series remote mounted units are interfaced to the GTN 6XX/7XX for remote control of
transponder functions, as shown in figure 1-3 and figure 1-4. Refer to GTX 3X5 Pilot's Guide or GTX 3X5
ADS-B Maintenance Manual for more information about the controls and their functions.

NOTE
If the transponder is in the ON or ALT operating mode, the transponder becomes an active
part of the ATCRBS. The transponder will reply to interrogations from aircraft with TCAS
installed.

Figure 1-3 GTN 6XX Transponder Control

Figure 1-4 GTN 7XX Transponder Control

Figure 1-5 GTX 335/345 Front Panel

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 1-12
Key Selection Functions for GTX 335/345:
OFF De-energizes the GTX 335/345.
SBY Selects the Standby mode. Push the STBY key when the GTX 335/345 is de-
energized to automatically energize the unit on in standby mode. When in
standby mode, the transponder does not reply to any interrogations but new
codes can be put in and a SBY indication will show on the display.
ON Selects the On mode, which gives Mode A and Mode S replies, but Mode C
altitude reporting is prevented. Push the ON key when the GTX 335/345 is
de-energized to automatically energize the unit in Mode A, and transmit a
squawk code when interrogated. ADS-B Out will not return barometric
altitude as it switches to GPS altitude while in this mode. Interrogations are
shown by the reply symbol (R). For On mode, the replies do not include
altitude information.
ALT Altitude mode is automatically selected when the aircraft becomes airborne,
through the use of the units air/ground logic, or when the ALT key is pushed.
Push the ALT key when the GTX 335/345 is de-energized to automatically
energize the unit in altitude reporting mode. While the aircraft is on the
ground and in ALT mode, the transponder does not give Mode A and Mode C
replies, but it does give acquisition squitter and replies to discretely addressed
Mode S interrogations.
While the aircraft is in ALT mode and airborne it will give Mode A, Mode C,
and Mode S replies and give transmissions of acquisition and extended
squitter, to include ADS-B Out.
All transponder interrogation replies are shown by the Reply symbol (R).
IDENT Push the IDENT key to start the SPI Pulse for 18 seconds. During the IDENT
period the word “IDENT” shows in the upper left corner of the display.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 1-13
VFR Sets the transponder code to the pre-programmed VFR code selected in
Configuration mode (set to 1200 at the factory). Push the VFR key again to
restore the identification code used before.
FUNC In normal mode, push the FUNC key to change the subpage group shown on
the right side of the display. Subpages include: Flight ID, Pressure Altitude,
Flight Time, Altitude Monitor, System Count Up, and Count Down Timers. In
the Configuration mode, moves through the function pages.
ENT Accepts entry for selected item and moves the cursor to the next changeable
item, or function selection, in configuration and normal operation. Starts and
stops the Altitude Monitor, Count Up, Count Down, and Flight timers.
CRSR Selects changeable fields in configuration and normal operation. Starts entry
of the start time for the Count Down timer and cancels transponder code entry.
Hold the CRSR key to put the unit into a Ground Test mode that forces the
aircraft into an airborne status for tests.
CLR Resets the Count Up, Count Down, and Flight timers. Cancels the key pushed
before during code selection, Count Down entry, or flight ID entry. Used in
Configuration mode to scroll through the function pages.
8 Used as a scroll-up key to move through page groups in normal and
configuration mode.
9 Used as a scroll-down key to move through page groups in normal and
configuration mode.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 1-14
Display Functions:
FLIGHT ID If the system is configured to ALLOW PILOT TO EDIT FLT ID in
configuration mode to YES, the FLIGHT ID can be changed by the pilot at
any time in normal mode. This lets the pilot/crew to put in the specific Flight
ID for transmission to ATC interrogations.
UP COUNTER Timer controlled by ENT and CLR keys.
DOWN COUNTER Timer controlled by ENT, CLR, and CRSR keys. The initial Count Down
time is put in with the 0 - 9 keys.
FLIGHT TIMER Shows the Flight Time, controlled by the ENT key or by one of four airborne
sources (squat/collective switch, GPS ground speed recognition, air data
airspeed recognition or altitude increase) as configured during installation.
The timer starts when the GTX 3X5 finds that the aircraft is airborne.
TRIP TIMER Timer controlled by ENT and CLR keys.
PRESSURE ALT Shows the altitude data supplied to the GTX 3X5 in feet, hundreds of feet
(i.e., flight level), or meters, selected at configuration.
ALT MONITOR Controlled by ENT key. Operates a voice alarm and warning annunciator
when above altitude limit.
SAT/DALT Shows when the GTX 3X5 is configured with temperature input. Shows Static
Air Temperature and Density Altitude.
CONTRAST/OFFSET Contrast is controlled by the 8 and 9 keys.
BACKLIGHT/OFFSET This page is only shown if photocell backlighting mode is selected in
Configuration mode. Backlighting is controlled by the 8 and 9 keys.
MESSAGES Tells crew of transponder faults, fails and advisory messages. MSG shows
when a message is generated, CRSR and ENT keys accesses messages to
view and acknowledgment.
BLUETOOTH This page is only shown on the GTX 345 when configured for Bluetooth at
installation and GTN is not configured for HSDB. When selected, allows
PED to pair to the GTX 345 and device management to show ADS-B In data.
1090ES TX CTRL This is only shown when the unit is configured for 1090ES OUT CONTROL
in Configuration mode to be PILOT SET. When configured, this can be
highlighted by the CRSR key, changed by the 8 and 9 keys, and selected by
ENT key. Sets the extended squitter function on or off.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 1-15
1.4.4 Garmin Altitude Encoder
The GAE module is a source of barometric altitude meeting requirements for ADS-B Out compliance. The
sensor module connects to the rotorcraft static system. The module attaches to the rear connector plate with
two screws, and has short, unshielded wires to connect to the GTX 3X5 unit through the rear D-sub
connector with the same connection as the configuration module. The GAE includes the configuration
module, so if the GAE is used, a separate configuration module is not required. Refer to section 4.1.1 for
installation guidance.

Figure 1-6 Garmin Altitude Encoder

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 1-16
1.5 System Installation
This section defines conditions and minimum equipment required for installation of the GTX system.
1.5.1 Pre-Installation Checklist
Rotorcraft intended for installation of the GTX 3X5 system under this STC must meet the eligibility
requirements listed in table 1-3. Each of the items listed has to be accomplished before GTX system
installation starts.

Table 1-3 GTX 3X5 Installation Eligibility Checklist

Required

GTX 335/335R

GTX 335/335R

GTX 345/345R

GTX 345/345R

Complete
With GPS

With GPS
Prerequisite Reference

Aircraft is on AML AML     


Uncorrected pressure altitude source
or GAE option installed
Appendix C     

Control source for remote units


installed (GTN 6XX/7XX)
Appendix C  [1]  [1]  [1]  [1] 

Bluetooth reception verified for GTX


345R installation
Section 3.5   

SBAS/GPS system installed Appendix C   


Section 3.11
SBAS/GPS antenna installed and     
Section 3.12

Transponder antenna installed Section 3.11     


Adequate means for physical
installation exist
Section 4.1     

Adequate means for electrical


bonding exist
Section 3.12.3     

Planned equipment interfaces have


airworthiness approval (STC or Appendix C     
other)

Existing operational limitations have


no adverse effect on installation
Section 2     

Electrical system is adequate for the


installation
Section 7     

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 1-17
Required

GTX 335/335R

GTX 335/335R

GTX 345/345R

GTX 345/345R

Complete
With GPS

With GPS
Prerequisite Reference

Rotorcraft is not equipped with TCAS


II system
Section 2     

Rotorcraft is not equipped with


Rockwell Collins Radio Tuning Unit Section 2     
(RTU)

[1] Required for GTX remote mount units only.


1.5.2 Altitude Input
An altitude encoder, air data computer, or other source that supplies uncorrected pressure altitude
information must be installed for ADS-B operation. The GTX 3X5 receives external air data in these
formats:
 ARINC 429
 RS-232
 Gray Code
 HSDB (GTX 345/345R Only)
The GAE can be used as a source of altitude information for the GTX 3X5. Refer to appendix A for GAE
installation details. Refer to appendix C for a list of compatible altitude sources.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 1-18
1.5.3 GPS Position Source

NOTE
For the transponder to send precision and integrity information required by AC-20-165A
Version 2 compliant equipment, the external GPS unit's RS-232 serial output must be
configured to the extended ADS-B format. This is shown through selections with a “+” in
the selections title (i.e., ADS-B OUT+, GTX Mode S+, Panel GTX w TIS+).

NOTE
The approval of ADS-B Version 2 requires an approved GPS/SBAS source. Use of the GPS
navigator other than specified in the approved equipment list requires a separate
approval. Only GPS/SBAS sources listed in appendix C are approved by this STC.
GPS/SBAS unit part numbers and software versions must be as listed in the approved
equipment list. Go to the Garmin Dealer Resource Center or contact Garmin for any
required software updates. It is possible for the navigator to have an incorrect software
version installed.

Position source is an important component of the GTX to supply compliant ADS-B Out. The GTX 3X5
can use an external GPS/SBAS source or use an optional internal GPS/SBAS receiver, available in specific
models. The GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Equipment List specifies a combination of required GPS
receiver and software part numbers that meet 14 CFR 91.227 requirements and are approved to interface
with the GTX. One of these GPS receiver and software part numbers must be installed before this STC
installation can begin.
1.5.4 Mutual Suppression Bus
Other equipment on the aircraft can transmit and receive in the same frequency band as the GTX
transponder system (i.e., DME, TAS/TCAS system, or another transponder). Mutual Suppression is a
synchronous pulse that is sent to the other equipment to suppress transmission of a different transmitter/
receiver during the pulse train transmission. The GTX transmission can be suppressed by an external
source and other equipment on board can be suppressed by the GTX system. This feature is designed to
reduce mutual interference.
If a transponder, DME, TAS/TCAS system, or other equipment that uses 1030 MHz and 1090 MHz
(L-Band) frequencies is installed, a suppression line between the GTX transponder and the other connected
equipment must be installed to prevent mutual interference. Diagrams of suppression I/O interconnects
between the GTX 3X5 and other equipment are in appendix B.
I/O suppression pulses may not be compatible with all models of DME transponders and active traffic
systems. The Garmin GTX series suppression circuit has known incompatibility with Bendix/King DME,
and Transponders, such as the KN, KNS, KT series units suppression method. No connection of the
GTX 3X5 suppression should be made to incompatible systems as damage to the GTX 3X5 may result.
1.5.5 Air/Ground Determination
The GTX system will change automatically to an airborne state if it senses the aircraft has become
airborne. Depending on configuration settings, the GTX can determine the air/ground state through a
discrete input or an assortment of inputs from a GPS source, HAT source, collective switch, radio altimeter
source, or air data source.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 1-19
1.5.6 Aircraft Heading Input (Optional)
The GTX accepts heading information from ARINC 429, RS-232, or HSDB (GTX 345/345R units only)
sources. For a list of compatible equipment, refer to appendix C.
The supply of ownship heading to the GTX 345/345R improves correlation performance when it includes
an external traffic system. The GTX includes ownship heading information in the ADS-B Out transmission
when on the ground, if available.
1.5.7 Radar Altimeter Input (Optional)
The radar altimeter input is used to determine the CSA decreased sensitivity levels or can help determine
the airborne state of the rotorcraft. For a list of compatible equipment, refer to appendix C.
The GTX 3X5 must include a radar altimeter input if an external traffic sensor is interfaced and there is a
radar altimeter installed in the rotorcraft.
1.5.8 External Traffic System (Optional GTX 345/345R Only)
The GTX 345/345R interfaces to an external TAS or TCAS system for traffic correlation and control. For a
list of compatible equipment, refer to appendix C. The GTX 345/345R will handle all traffic aural alerts for
the TAS/TCAS I system.
1.5.9 No Display Traffic Alerting (Optional GTX 345 Only)
For GTX 345 installations without a traffic display, a traffic system annunciator and the audio output must
be connected as shown in appendix B to provide audible and visual traffic alerts. Traffic can be shown on
an optional Personal Electronic Device (PED) Bluetooth-enabled device compatible with Garmin Pilot
software.
1.5.10 External Sensors, Devices, and Interfaces
When the GTX 3X5 transponders are interfaced to external sensors, the sensors must be installed in
accordance with the sensor manufacturer's data. This manual does not give data for the installation,
attachment or approval of any external sensors or devices. Refer to section 6 and appendix B for more
details on permitted inputs and configurations.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 1-20
1.6 Antennas
This STC provides airworthiness approval for installation or replacement of a transponder, but not for the
installation of related transponder and GPS/SBAS antennas.
1.6.1 Transponder Antenna Requirements
The GTX transponder series requires an L-Band/UHF antenna approved to TSO-C66( ) or C74( ) with the
antenna baseplate electrically bonded to the ground plane with a direct current (DC) resistance less than or
equal to 2.5 milliohms. Existing antenna installations must meet these requirements. If the antenna does
not meet these requirements, an approved installation of a compliant antenna must be accomplished. If a
GTX transponder was installed before, changes to the antenna or antenna coaxial cable may not be
required. For transponder antenna guidance, refer to section 3.
1.6.2 GPS Antenna Requirements (GTX 3X5 with SBAS/GPS Only)
The GTX 3X5 with GPS/SBAS must be connected to one of the antennas listed in table 3-21. Existing
antenna installation must use one of the models listed. If not, instlalation and airworthiness approval of
required antenna must be accomplished through other means. For guidance on GPS antennas, refer to
section 3.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 1-21
1.7 Technical Specifications
1.7.1 Power Requirements
The GTX 3X5 units can operate at 14 or 28 VDC. Table 1-4 lists current draw specifications.

Table 1-4 Electrical Load

Specification
Unit Characteristic
14 VDC 28 VDC
Input current, typical 0.57 A 0.29 A
GTX 335
Input current, maximum 0.86 A 0.43 A

Input current, typical 0.72 A 0.36 A


GTX 335,
w/ GPS
Input current, maximum 1.22 A 0.61 A

Input current, typical 0.72 A 0.36 A


GTX 345
Input current, maximum 1.30 A 0.65 A

Input current, typical 1.07 A 0.54 A


GTX 345,
w/ GPS
Input current, maximum 1.43 A 0.72 A

65 µA typical 20 µA typical
GTX 335/345,
KEEP ALIVE input current
w/ GPS
85 µA maximum 40 µA maximum

1.7.2 EQF
The installer must obtain the latest revision of the EQF. To get a copy of the EQF, refer to Garmin’s Dealer
Resource Center. For the applicable GTX EQF part number, refer to table 1-5.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 1-22
1.8 Reference Documentation

Table 1-5 Garmin Documents

Document P/N
G500H Rotorcraft STC Installation Manual 190-01150-06

GTX 3X5 Environmental Qualification Form 005-00752-02

GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Equipment List 005-00734-A5

GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML Maintenance Manual/ICA 190-00734-21

GNS 400W Series Installation Manual 190-00356-08

GNS 500W Series Installation Manual 190-00357-08

GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML RFMS 190-00734-22

GA 35, GA 36, GA 37 Antenna Installation Instructions 190-00848-00

GTN 625/635/650 TSO Installation Manual 190-01004-02

GTN 625/635/650 Pilot's Guide 190-01004-03

GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual 190-01007-02

GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide 190-01007-03

GTN 6XX/7XX Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-B3

GTX 3X5 Series Transponder Pilot’s Guide 190-01499-00

GTX 3X5 TSO Installation Manual 190-01499-02

14 CFR 91.227 ADS-B Out Compatible Equipment 190-01533-00

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 1-23
Table 1-6 Federal Aviation Administration Documents

Document P/N
FAA Advisory Circular, Airworthiness Approval of Automatic Dependent
AC 20-165A
Surveillance-Broadcast (ADS-B) Out Systems

FAA Advisory Circular, Airworthiness Approval for ADS-B In Systems


AC 20-172A
and Applications

FAA Advisory Circular, Guide for Obtaining a Supplemental Type


AC 21-40A
Certificate

FAA Advisory Circular, Acceptable Methods, Techniques, and


AC 43.13-1B
Practices - Aircraft Inspection and Repair

FAA Advisory Circular, Acceptable Methods, Techniques, and


AC 43.13-2B
Practices - Aircraft Alterations

FAA Order, Type Certification Order 8110.4C

Major Repair and Alteration (Airframe, Powerplant, Propeller, or


Form 337
Appliance)

Table 1-7 Industry Standards

Document P/N
Standard Guide for Aircraft Electrical Load and Power Source Capacity
ASTM F2490-05
Analysis

Aerospace Systems Electrical Bonding and Grounding for


SAE ARP1870
Electromagnetic Compatibility and Safety

1.9 STC Permission


Consistent with FAA Order 8110.4C and FAA AC 21-40A, a permission letter to use this STC data is
available for download at Garmin’s Dealer Resource Center.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 1-24
2 LIMITATIONS
2.1 Operational Limitations ....................................................................................................................2-1
2.2 Installation Limitations .....................................................................................................................2-2
2.2.1 Equipment Interfaced to the GTX ..............................................................................................2-2
2.2.2 Preservation of Certified Systems ..............................................................................................2-2
2.2.3 Major Alterations .......................................................................................................................2-2
2.2.4 Antennas.....................................................................................................................................2-3

NOTE
The TSO authorizations with the RTCA/DO-178B software levels by function are in
GTX 3X5 TSO Installation Manual.

2.1 Operational Limitations


Refer to the RFMS available at the Garmin Dealer Resource Center for operational limitations.
If installing a GTX 3X5 in a rotorcraft that has another ADS-B Out system, then the following must be
considered:
1. Current FAA guidance allows multiple ADS-B Out transmissions on both links if the ICAO
rotorcraft identifier is provided on both systems to allow the ADS-B receive systems to determine
the transmissions are from the same rotorcraft.
2. It is required under this STC that if a rotorcraft transmits ADS-B Out on multiple data links, all
ADS-B Out link versions shall be compatible. For example, a 1090 ADS-B out that is MASPS V1
is not compatible with a UAT ADS-B out system that is MASPS V2 compliant. In this case, the
FAA ADS-B compliance monitors would identify this as a non-compliant aircraft even though it
would qualify as a fully compliant aircraft if transmitting on UAT alone. In this case, the 1090
system would require upgrade to MASPS V2 compliance (required to meet the ADS-B out
mandate by 2020) or disabling for the aircraft to continue operation after the 2020 mandate takes
effect.
3. Under this STC, it is required that all ADS-B out systems be fully compliant at the time the aircraft
is equipped with any fully compliant ADS-B out system. This can be accomplished by either
disabling the earlier version of ADS-B out, or upgrading it to meet full compliance requirements.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 2-1
2.2 Installation Limitations
Refer to the applicable environmental qualification form to identify GTX installation limitations for the
possible interface to other installed LRUs.
Installation of the GTX 3X5 is limited to locations designated for installation of avionics and/or equipment
by the rotorcraft or equipment manufacturer (TC or STC holder).
The following rotorcraft makes and models from the STC AML are limited to remote installation of the
GTX 3X5 with vertical mount:
 MD Helicopter model 369D
 MD Helicopter model 369E
 MD Helicopter model 600N
All other models on the AML may use either vertical or horizontal mounts.
If this STC is used as the basis for installation approval in models of rotorcraft other than those on the
AML, then the following limitations should be considered:
Locations corresponding to helicopter vibration zones for which the GTX 3X5 has been qualified (zones
1a and 2, ref. DO-160G, table 8-2a) which include any location within the fuselage, instrument panel
console, or equipment rack shall be used. Installation of the GTX 3X5 with the 115-01771-01 rack
(horizontal mount) is limited to rotorcraft with main rotor first blade passage frequency less than or equal
to 42.75 Hz. Rotorcraft with main rotor first blade passage frequency greater than 42.75 Hz are limited to
remote GTX 3X5 installation with 011-03762-00 vertical mount kit.
Main rotor first blade passage frequency equals NM x FM where:
FM - Main rotor frequency counted in revolutions per second (Hz)
NM - Number of blades on the main rotor
Refer to the rotorcraft model type certificate data sheet, or rotorcraft flight manual for main rotor limits and
number of blades.
2.2.1 Equipment Interfaced to the GTX
The STC only approves the interface connections between the GTX 3X5 and other aircraft systems as
specified in this manual. If the GNS 430W/530W and GTN 6XX/7XX are both interfaced to a
GTX 335/335R unit for TIS-A traffic, the GNS 430W/530W must be the TIS-A control source and the
GTN 6XX/7XX TIS-A control must be off. GTX interfaces to aircraft systems other than those identified
in this manual require separate airworthiness approval. The GTX 3X5 is not approved to interface with:
 TCAS II traffic systems
 Rockwell Collins Radio Tuning Unit (RTU)
Additional interfaces that are possible with the GTX 3X5, but not approved by this STC are as follows:
 Installation of switches.
 Installation of outside air temperature probes.
 Enhanced Surveillance - the equipment connections required to meet Mode S EHS criteria are not
covered in the design data associated with this AML STC.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 2-2
2.2.2 Preservation of Certified Systems
It is the installer’s responsibility using the data provided in this STC to preserve the essential
characteristics of the rotorcraft in accordance with the rotorcraft manufacturer’s type design and the
requirements of 14 CFR Part 27. For IFR, FADEC, or Stability Augmentation System/Autopilot equipped
rotorcraft, refer to section 3.12.2 for special considerations.
2.2.3 Major Alterations
The installation of the GTX 3X5 system is an alteration to aircraft type design, and documentation of this
alteration must be recorded on FAA form 337. Equipment and systems the GTX is interfaced to must be
documented on this form.
2.2.4 Antennas
Only transponder and SBAS/GPS antennas that comply with the requirements of section 1.6.1 and
section 1.6.2 can be used with the GTX 3X5. The scope of this STC does not include the installation of
antennas. If necessary, antenna installation is accomplished through separate approval.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 2-3
3 INSTALLATION OVERVIEW
3.1 Installation Considerations ...............................................................................................................3-2
3.2 Installation Materials ........................................................................................................................3-2
3.2.1 Materials Available from Garmin ..............................................................................................3-2
3.2.2 Materials Required but Not Supplied.........................................................................................3-3
3.2.3 Annunciators ..............................................................................................................................3-3
3.3 Tools and Equipment ........................................................................................................................3-4
3.4 Minimum System Configuration ......................................................................................................3-5
3.4.1 ADS-B Out Installation (GTX 335/335R) .................................................................................3-5
3.4.2 ADS-B Out and ADS-B In Installation (GTX 345/345R) .........................................................3-5
3.4.3 No-Display Traffic Alerting Installation (GTX 345, Only) .......................................................3-5
3.5 Wireless Interface to PED (GTX 345/345R Only)...........................................................................3-6
3.6 External Devices and Sensors...........................................................................................................3-8
3.6.1 Control and Display Source .......................................................................................................3-8
3.6.2 Altitude Source...........................................................................................................................3-9
3.6.3 Uncorrected Pressure Altitude Source .......................................................................................3-9
3.6.4 Heading Source ........................................................................................................................3-10
3.6.5 GPS Sources .............................................................................................................................3-11
3.6.6 Radio Altimeter Source ............................................................................................................3-11
3.6.7 Traffic System ..........................................................................................................................3-11
3.6.8 Other ADS-B Out Systems ......................................................................................................3-11
3.7 Traffic Annunciator and Switches ..................................................................................................3-12
3.8 Circuit Protection............................................................................................................................3-13
3.9 Placards and Labels ........................................................................................................................3-13
3.10 Cooling............................................................................................................................................3-13
3.11 Antennas .........................................................................................................................................3-14
3.11.1 Transponder Antenna ...............................................................................................................3-14
3.11.2 GPS Antenna ............................................................................................................................3-17
3.11.3 Model Specific GPS Antenna Installation ...............................................................................3-20
3.12 Standard Practices...........................................................................................................................3-21
3.12.1 Audio Interference....................................................................................................................3-21
3.12.2 Cable and Wiring .....................................................................................................................3-21
3.12.3 Electrical Bonding and Ground Plane Requirements...............................................................3-23
3.12.4 Aluminum Surface Preparation ................................................................................................3-25
3.12.5 Antenna Bonding......................................................................................................................3-25
3.13 Electrical Load Analysis.................................................................................................................3-27
3.13.1 Measurement of Electrical Loads.............................................................................................3-27
3.13.2 Battery Capacity Analysis ........................................................................................................3-34

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 3-1
3.1 Installation Considerations
The following items must be completed prior to starting the installation.
1. Complete the checklist in section 1.5.1.
2. Complete the electrical load analysis per section 7.
3. Determine the location for installation of the GTX unit and wire/cable routing.
4. Analyze the weight and balance per applicable model specific procedure to verify that rotorcraft
limits are not exceeded with the GTX installed at the selected location. Refer to section 4 for unit
weight and center of gravity.
5. Verify the GTX does not interfere with other installed equipment and is compatible with all
previous alterations.
6. Verify GTX 345R unit Bluetooth reception per section 3.5.
7. Evaluate modification required to rotorcraft static system if installing the GAE.
3.2 Installation Materials
3.2.1 Materials Available from Garmin
Refer to table 3-1 through table 3-4 for a list of standard kits available from Garmin.

Table 3-1 GTX 3X5 Connector Kit Options


Unit Item P/N
GTX 335/335R Connector kit 011-02977-00
GTX 345/345R Connector kit 011-02977-01

Table 3-2 GTX 3X5 Backplate Assembly Options


Unit Item P/N
GTX 3X5 standard mount with GPS Backplate assembly 011-02976-01
GTX 3X5 standard mount without GPS Backplate assembly 011-02976-00
GTX 3X5 vertical mount without GPS Backplate assembly 011-02976-10
GTX 3X5 vertical mount with GPS Backplate assembly 011-02976-11
GTX 3X5 vertical mount with TNC XPDR Backplate assembly 011-02976-12

Table 3-3 GTX 3X5 Mount Rack Options


Unit Item P/N
GTX 3X5 vertical mount Install rack 011-03762-00
GTX 3X5 standard mount Install rack 115-01771-01

Table 3-4 GTX 3X5 Configuration Module


Unit Item P/N
GTX 3X5 Configuration module 011-00979-03
GTX 3X5 GAE with configuration module 011-03080-00

Table 3-5 Optional Supplies


Item P/N
1575.42 MHz notch filter for VHF COM transceiver antenna cable 330-00067-00

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 3-2
3.2.2 Materials Required but Not Supplied

NOTE
Refer to AC 43.13-1B, chapter 11, sections 5 through 7 for wire selection and sizing
information. Refer to section 3.11 and section 3.12 for coaxial cable specifications.
 MIL-W-22759/16 insulated stranded wire
 MIL-C-27500 cable with M22759/18 wire (TG) or ETFE jacket (14) shielded wire
 Coaxial cable
 Aircraft grade Category 5 Ethernet cable for installations that use HSDB interfaces (specified in
table 3-6)
Table 3-6 Permitted Installation Ethernet Cable P/Ns
Manufacturer P/N
E10424 (24 AWG)
PIC Wire and Cable E12424 (24 AWG)
E51424 (24 AWG)
Carlisle IT 392404 (24 AWG)
D100-0824-100 (24 AWG)
Emteq
D10004-664 (24 AWG)
Tensolite NF24Q100 (24 AWG)
Thermax MX100Q-24 (24 AWG)
 Standard fasteners (specified by installation drawing in appendix A)
 MS26574-( ), MS22073-( ), or other trip-free, push-pull circuit breaker type as specified by the
rotorcraft manufacturer or manufacturer of the avionics console and/or fuses as specified by the
rotorcraft manufacturer or manufacturer of the avionics console. Refer to figure B-1 for circuit
breaker rating.
 MS27718-22-1 or M83731/9-231 single pole toggle switch to control aural alerting for GTX 345
installations without traffic display or radio altitude input
 Wire bundle routing, securing, and management supplies, as required
 MS25036 or MS20659 ring terminals
 MS83519/2-X shield terminators
 A-A-59163 (MIL-I-46852C) silicone fusion tape
 USB A-to-B cable to interface between a laptop computer and the GTX 3X5
3.2.3 Annunciators

NOTE
GTX 345R installations do not utilize external annunciators, since all remote installations
require remote control through a display on the GTN 6XX/7XX.
GTX 345 installations which have no display for ADS-B In data visualization, require an external traffic
annunciator. The annunciator provides visual indication of conflict situational awareness traffic alerts.
Table 3-7 Annunciators
Manufacturer Description P/N Notes
Aerospace Optics Traffic Annunciator LED-40-17-HA1-E1G30
[1]
(Vivisun) Quick-connect plug 18-200
[1] The annunciator must have “TRAFFIC” displayed in amber text with a black background.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 3-3
3.3 Tools and Equipment
Connectors used for the GTX series transponders use crimp contacts. The recommended contact crimping
tools for the D-Sub connectors are shown in table 3-8.

Table 3-8 Recommended Crimping Tools


High Density 22-28 AWG
Hand Crimping
Manufacturer Insertion/
Tool Positioner
Extraction Tool
M81969/14-01
Military Spec. M22520/2-01 M22520/2-09
M81969/1-04
Positronic 9507-0-0-0 9502-4-0-0 4811-2-0-0
AMP 601966-1 601966-6 91067-1
Daniels AFM8 K42 M81969/1-04
Astro 615717 615725 M81969/1-04

This test equipment is required for the installation:


• Ramp tester with traffic (e.g., IFR 6000 or equivalent for system performance and checkout).
• Pitot/static test set for system performance and checkout for altitude reporting verification.
• To measure the electrical bonding between system components and aircraft ground, a Milliohm
meter with a precision of ±0.1 mΩ or better is required.
Optional test equipment that may be required for the installation:
• An ammeter with a precision of ±0.5 amps and a current capacity sufficient for the total aircraft
load for the ELA.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 3-4
3.4 Minimum System Configuration
3.4.1 ADS-B Out Installation (GTX 335/335R)
GTX 335/335R ADS-B Out (only) installations require the following:
1. GTX 335/335R transponder
2. Transponder antenna, as listed in section 3.11
3. GPS/SBAS source, as listed in appendix C, or GTX 335/335R with optional internal GPS/SBAS
receiver
4. GPS/SBAS antenna, as listed in section 3.11.2
5. GTX 335R control source for remote mounted units, as listed in appendix C
6. Altitude source, as listed in appendix C, or optional GAE
7. Radar altitude, collective switch, or height above terrain source, as listed in appendix C
3.4.2 ADS-B Out and ADS-B In Installation (GTX 345/345R)
GTX 345/345R ADS-B In and Out installations require the following:
1. GTX 345/345R transponder
2. Transponder antenna, as listed in section 3.11
3. GPS/SBAS source, as listed in appendix C, or GTX 345/345R with optional internal GPS/SBAS
receiver
4. GPS/SBAS antenna, as listed in section 3.11.2
5. GTX 345R control source for remote mounted units, as listed in appendix C
6. Altitude source, as listed in appendix C, or optional GAE
7. Audio panel
8. ADS-B In display source for TIS-B and FIS-B, as listed in appendix C
9. Radar altitude, collective switch, or height above terrain source, as listed in appendix C
3.4.3 No-Display Traffic Alerting Installation (GTX 345, Only)
GTX 345 panel mounted installations without a traffic display require the following for optional traffic
alerting:
1. GTX 345 transponder
2. Transponder antenna, as listed in section 3.11
3. GPS/SBAS source, as listed in appendix C, or GTX 345 with optional internal GPS/SBAS receiver
4. GPS/SBAS antenna, as listed in section 3.11.2
5. Altitude source, as listed in appendix C, or optional GAE
6. Audio panel
7. Radar altitude or collective switch as listed in appendix C
8. Traffic annunciator installed per appendix A
9. For installations without radar altitude sources, an audio mute toggle switch installed per
section 3.7 and appendix B

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 3-5
3.5 Wireless Interface to PED (GTX 345/345R Only)

NOTE
For best reception results, the GTX 345R must be installed with the connectors facing
away from the crew (i.e., the Garmin label must face the pilot). It is recommended to
install the GTX 345R unit as close to the crew as possible and minimize the amount of
metallic obstructions between the unit and the crew.
PEDs can be used to show ADS-B (FIS-B, TIS-B) data when connected wirelessly to the GTX 345/345R.
A PED with an operational Garmin Pilot account is required. For selected GTX 345R installation
locations, Bluetooth reception needs to be verified to ensure the unit has the capability to connect to PEDs
during normal aircraft operation.
To verify Bluetooth reception:
1. Load the PC based Install Tool as described in section 6.2.
2. Connect the computer to the GTX 345R per figure 3-1 to energize and configure the unit.
3. Perform verification steps as listed in table 3-9.

GTX 345R
AIRCRAFT POWER 1 21 +12 VDC
POWER GROUND 20
REMOTE POWER ON 38

USB VBUS POWER 44 RED VBUS USB TYPE B


USB DATA HI 2 GRN D+
USB DATA LO 24 WHT D- RECEPTACLE
USB GROUND 45 BLK GND DONGLE CABLE
P3451 S SHIELD
J3451

USB CABLE

TYBE B TO A
To Laptop Computer

Figure 3-1 Test Harness for Bluetooth Verification

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 3-6
Table 3-9 Bluetooth Reception Verification Check
Item Action Complete
1 Identify GTX 345R location for Installation. 
2 Temporarily place GTX 345R unit in the location for installation. 
3 Energize the unit. 
4 Use the GTX 3X5 Install Tool to make sure Bluetooth is selected. 
Temporarily install panels or hatches equivalent to the installation with the 
5
GTX 345R energized and Bluetooth selected.
Pair a PED with a Garmin Pilot account to the GTX 345R. Make sure there is 
6
satisfactory reception and connectivity for pilot and crew.
If reception and connectivity is not sufficient, move the unit until performance is 
7
satisfactory.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 3-7
3.6 External Devices and Sensors
The GTX accepts data from many sources. This section details how data is accepted if more than one data
source is used. The input priority of each external data source cannot be changed. GTX configuration is
detailed in section 6. Appendix C lists the equipment compatible with the GTX. Manufacturer’s data must
be considered for installation of any external devices or sensors. This STC does not include data for
airworthiness approval of any external devices or sensors.
3.6.1 Control and Display Source
GTX 335R/345R remote mounted units require an approved control source to operate. The GTX 345/345R
units supply ADS-B In data to approved displays. Approved control or display sources are listed in the
following table.

Table 3-10 Approved Control and Display Sources


Unit Control ADS-B Traffic ADS-B Weather
GTN 6XX/7XX RS-232 HSDB [1] HSDB [1]
GNS 4XX/5XX N/A ARINC 429 [2] RS-232 [2]
GDU 620 N/A HSDB [3] HSDB [3]
[1] Must have GTN software v6.11 or newer.
[2] Must have GNS software v5.30 or newer.
[3] Must have GDU software v7.11 or newer.
The GTX 345/345R can interface to an active traffic source on rotorcraft equipped with a G500H system.
With the GTX 345/345R interfaced to a GDU 620 display, pilot control of the TAS/TCAS system is
removed from the GDU 620 and the GTX unit controls the TAS/TCAS system with the air/ground logic.
Operation of a TAS/TCAS system is automatic. The system is in active mode when the rotorcraft is
airborne, and in standby mode when the rotorcraft is on the ground. The GTX 3X5 Installation Tool allows
for the following additional functions:
1. Selection of Operate mode for the external traffic sensor to perform TAS/TCAS traffic inspections.
2. Traffic self-test to perform a system traffic test of the TAS/TCAS system.
3. Placement of the transponder in an airborne state to conduct the required transponder checks on
the ground.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 3-8
3.6.2 Altitude Source
The GTX 3X5 requires a source of uncorrected pressure altitude. The GTX units accept altitude data from
an altitude encoder, air data computer, EFIS, or encoding altimeter. Refer to table 3-11 for more
information. Refer to appendix C for a list of compatible altitude sources.

Table 3-11 Altitude Source Options


Altitude Source Transponder Unit
ARINC 429 GTX 3X5
RS-232 GTX 3X5
Gray code GTX 3X5
GAE GTX 3X5
HSDB GTX 345/345R
3.6.3 Uncorrected Pressure Altitude Source
The GTX units accepts uncorrected pressure altitude from many sources. If more than one source of
altitude data is supplied to the GTX, only valid data from the highest priority source is used. If the highest
priority source becomes unavailable, then the data comes from the next-highest priority source. The
priorities of the altitude sources, from highest to lowest, are as follows.

Table 3-12 Pressure Altitude Source Priority


Priority Altitude Source Notes
1 ARINC 429 label 203 from an ADC GTX 3X5
2 ARINC 429 label 203 from an EFIS/ADC GTX 3X5
3 RS-232 from an ADC GTX 3X5
4 RS-232 from a 25ft-resolution altitude source GTX 3X5
5 RS-232 from a remote control panel GTX 3X5
6 HSDB pressure altitude from GTN #1 GTX 345/345R
7 HSDB pressure altitude from GTN #2 GTX 345/345R
8 HSDB pressure altitude from GDU #1 GTX 345/345R
9 HSDB pressure altitude from GDU #2 GTX 345/345R
10 GAE GTX 3X5
11 Gray code altitude GTX 3X5
12 RS-232 from a 100ft-resolution altitude source GTX 3X5

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 3-9
3.6.4 Heading Source
The GTX 345/345R units use true heading data to improve correlation performance when connected to an
external traffic system. GTX 345/345R units can also use magnetic variation data to improve correlation
performance if true heading data is not available. Refer to table 3-13 for heading selections. Refer to
appendix C for approved heading sources. The LRU that supplies the heading data must also supply the
correct heading label. The GTN will not pass heading data from the following GTN 6XX/7XX inputs:
 GTN does not pass label 320 from ARINC 429 inputs configured as: ARINC 429 Data
Concentrator or ARINC 429 Traffic Format 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6
 GTN does not pass heading information from RS-232 inputs configured as: RS-232 FADEC
Format 1, Airdata Format 1, or Lightning Detector 1
If the heading is not received from the GTN, traffic will not be displayed on the moving map page.

Table 3-13 Heading Source Options


True Heading Data Source Source Transponder Unit
ARINC 429 Label 314 True Heading GTX 3X5
RS-232 True Heading GTX 3X5
ARINC 429 Label 320 Magnetic Heading GTX 3X5
RS-232 Magnetic Heading GTX 3X5
RS-232 Magnetic Variation GTX 345/345R
HSDB Magnetic Heading GTX 345/345R
HSDB Magnetic Variation GTX 345/345R
The GTX unit accepts heading data from multiple sources. If multiple sources of heading data are supplied
to the GTX then only valid data from the highest priority source is used. If the highest priority source
becomes unavailable then the next-highest priority source supplies the data. The priorities of the heading
sources are as follows - from highest to lowest.

Table 3-14 Multiple Heading Source Priority


Priority Heading Source Notes
1 ARINC 429 Label 314 from heading GTX 3X5
2 ARINC 429 Label 320 from heading GTX 3X5
3 ARINC 429 Label 314 from AHRS GTX 3X5
4 ARINC 429 Label 320 from AHRS GTX 3X5
5 ARINC 429 Label 314 from EFIS GTX 3X5
6 ARINC 429 Label 320 from EFIS GTX 3X5
7 RS-232 True Heading from remote control panel GTX 3X5
8 RS-232 Magnetic Heading from remote control panel GTX 3X5
9 HSDB Magnetic Heading from GTN #1 GTX 345/345R
10 HSDB Magnetic Heading from GTN #2 GTX 345/345R
11 HSDB Magnetic Variation from GTN #1 GTX 345/345R
12 HSDB Magnetic Variation from GTN #2 GTX 345/345R
13 HSDB Magnetic Heading from GDU #1 GTX 345/345R
14 HSDB Magnetic Heading from GDU #2 GTX 345/345R
15 HSDB Magnetic Variation from GDU #1 GTX 345/345R
16 HSDB Magnetic Variation from GDU #2 GTX 345/345R

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 3-10
3.6.5 GPS Sources
The GTX 3X5 requires a GPS/SBAS source for ADS-B Out and In. Only GPS/SBAS data sources and
software versions listed in appendix C can interface to the GTX.
The GTX automatically selects the highest quality GPS/SBAS source if multiple GPS data sources are
interfaced. If the quality criteria of the GPS sources are equal then the GPS data is pulled from GPS Source
#1 as set during GTX configuration.
3.6.6 Radio Altimeter Source
The radar altimeter input is an optional input to the GTX 3X5 that uses other LRUs for air/ground
determination or to find CSA decreased sensitivity levels for the GTX 345/345R units.
 Refer to appendix C for compatible radio altimeter sources and equipment configuration.
 Refer to appendix B Interconnect Diagrams for equipment interconnect diagrams.

Table 3-15 Radar Altimeter Priority List


Priority Source Notes
1 ARINC 429 Label 164 from radar altimeter GTX 3X5
2 ARINC 429 Label 164 from EFIS/ADC GTX 3X5
3 RS-232 from a remote control panel GTX 3X5
4 HSDB radio height from GTN #1 GTX 345/345R Only
5 HSDB radio height from GTN #2 GTX 345/345R Only
6 HSDB radio height from GDU 620 #1 GTX 345/345R Only
7 HSDB radio height from GDU 620 #2 GTX 345/345R Only
3.6.7 Traffic System
The GTX 345/345R units can interface to external traffic systems to supply correlated ADS-B In and TAS/
TCAS traffic to approved displays. The GTX 345/345R can use HSDB or optional discrete connections to
automatically put the external traffic system in operate or standby depending on the air/ground state of the
rotorcraft. The GTX 345/345R units also provide the capability to do a self-test command to the external
traffic system through HSDB or a discrete connection.
The GTX 345/345R provides the traffic alert audio to the audio panel, so the external traffic system must
not interface to the audio panel if it is interfacing to the GTX 345/345R for correlated traffic.
 Refer to appendix C for compatible traffic systems.
 Refer to section 6 for equipment configuration.
 Refer to appendix B for equipment interconnect diagrams.
3.6.8 Other ADS-B Out Systems
If the GTX 3X5 transponder is being installed in a rotorcraft with other ADS-B Out capable equipment, the
other ADS-B Out equipment must be Version 2 compliant (TSO-C166b/RTCA DO-260B or TSOC154c/
DO-282B). The UAT or 1090 ES transmit functionality of a Version 1 compliant system must be disabled
if it is not upgraded to be Version 2 compliant. Table 3-16 identifies actions that must be taken to make
sure that only Version 2 compliant ADS-B and UAT systems are able to transmit.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 3-11
Table 3-16 Version 2 Compliance with Installation of Multiple ADS-B Out Equipment
Other ADS-B Out System: Action
TSO-C154c / DO-282B UAT
None. Both systems are Version 2
equipment
compliant.
(UAT Version 2 Compliant)
Option 1: Upgrade UAT equipment
to be Version 2 compliant. Contact
equipment manufacturer for
TSO-C154b / DO-282A UAT possible upgrade selections.
equipment Option 2: Disable transmit
GTX 3X5 with ADS-B Out (UAT Version 1 Compliant) functionality of Version 1
(TSO-C166b / DO-260B) compliant equipment. Refer to
(ADS-B Version 2 Compliant) equipment manufacturer's
installation manual for instructions.
TSO-C166b / DO-260B 1090ES Two ADS-B Out systems on the
equipment same link must not be operated at
(ADS-B Version 2 Compliant) the same time. Disable transmit
TSO-C166a / DO-260A 1090ES functionality of other ADS-B
equipment equipment. Refer to equipment
(ADS-B Version 1 Compliant) manufacturer's installation manual
for instructions.

3.7 Traffic Annunciator and Switches


For installations which do not include cockpit display of traffic information but do provide traffic aural
alerts, a traffic annunciator must be installed in the rotorcraft instrument panel. Additionally, if the non-
display ADS-B In installation (GTX 345 only) does not include radar altimeter input, a toggle switch to
control traffic aural alerts is required.
The GTX 3X5 can be connected to optional external momentary switches for ALRT ACK and IDENT as
shown in figure B-2 of appendix B. Toggle switches can be added to discrete inputs for other functions.
Refer to section 8 for GTX 3X5 available discrete outputs and inputs.
For GTX 345 installations with neither traffic display nor radio altitude input, a TRFC AURAL on/off
switch is required. Use MS27718-22-1, M83731/9-231, or other on/off switch approved by the rotorcraft
manufacturer.
If switches are installed, they must meet the following requirements:
1. The switch must be labeled as detailed in section 3.9.
2. The switch must be readily accessible to the pilot.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 3-12
3.8 Circuit Protection

NOTE
Added GTX 3X5 circuits must be protected in accordance with the approved data in this
document. Refer the GTX 3X5 interconnect diagrams in appendix B for circuit breaker
ratings.

The GTX must be connected to an avionics bus (non-essential bus) so power is supplied when the avionics
master switch is energized. Circuit breaker ratings are shown in the GTX interconnect diagram in appendix
B. Circuit protection devices for the GTX units must be as specified in section 3.2.2.
For rotorcraft models using fuses, fuse ratings must be determined using the guidelines of AC 43.13-1B,
chapter 11, section 4. Spare fuses of the appropriate rating need to be made available to the crew if fuses
are accessible in flight. All circuit protection devices specified in this manual are referred to as “circuit
breakers.”
3.9 Placards and Labels
The added GTX 3X5 circuit breaker must be labeled. Added GTX 3X5 switches must be labeled as shown
in appendix B. Added placards or labels shall:
1. Be located adjacent to added circuit breaker and switches.
2. Be readable in all cockpit lighting conditions (readability in ambient flood lighting is satisfactory).
3. Be not easily erased, damaged, or obscured.
4. Have text size, style, and colors match existing placards.
3.10 Cooling
The GTX 3X5 does not require external cooling. An air nozzle at the rear of the unit allows for the
application of forced air cooling. The fan air inlet and the exhaust vent on the side of the unit must remain
free of obstructions if forced air cooling is used. Verify installation of the GTX 3X5 does not affect
existing avionics cooling.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 3-13
3.11 Antennas
Key parameters of antenna installations required to meet the GTX transponder and ADS-B requirements
are summarized in this section.

NOTE
This STC does not provide the data, neither the airworthiness approval for antenna
installation. Antenna installation requires separate airworthiness approval.

NOTE
For the particular antenna model, refer to the antenna manufacturer’s data for
installation guidance and minimum performance specifications.

3.11.1 Transponder Antenna


Changes are not required to antennas or the antenna coax if an existing GTX transponder is already
installed and meets the requirements of this manual. When upgrading from a non-Garmin transponder, the
existing transponder antenna must be:
1. TSO-C66( ) or C74( ).
2. 50 ohm vertically poloarized with a VSWR < 1.7:1 at 978 MHz, and < 1.5:1 at 1090 MHz.
3. Antenna baseplate must be electrically bonded to a ground plane that is bonded to the airframe
electrical ground with a direct current (DC) resistance less than or equal to 2.5 milliohms.
4. At least 20 inches away from any FADEC, and at least 20 inches from any other transponder, TAS/
TCAS, DME, or 1030/1090 MHz antenna.
The transponder antenna must be installed on a ground plane:
1. Away from major protrusions (i.e., antenna masts, wire cutters, etc.).
2. As far away as practical from landing gear doors, access doors, or other openings that can affect its
radiation pattern.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 3-14
Table 3-17 Approved UAT/1090 Antennas
Model/ Connector
Manufacturer P/N Notes
Description Type
DME
Aero Antenna AT130-16 TNC DC grounded
transponder
DME
CI-100 BNC Open circuit
transponder
DME
CI-100-2 TNC Open circuit
transponder
DME
CI-105 BNC Open circuit
transponder
DME
CI-105-3 BNC Open circuit
transponder
DME
Comant CI-105-16 BNC Open circuit
transponder
DME
CI-110-40-30 C Open circuit
transponder
DME
CI-110-41-30 C DC grounded
transponder
DME
CI-110-60-30 C Open circuit
transponder
DME
CI-110-61-30 C DC grounded
transponder
Dayton-Granger L10-611-( ) L-Band blade C DC grounded
590-0052 or
A-40 TNC Open circuit
013-00219-00
Garmin
590-0051 or
A-41 TNC DC grounded
013-00174-00

Table 3-18 Maximum Antenna-to-Transponder Separation


Transponder Antenna Cable Assembly Cable Loss [1] Maximum Antenna Spacing [2]
0.75 dB < Cable Loss < 1.0 dB 137 inches
1.0 dB < Cable Loss < 2.0 dB 122 inches
[1] Cable assembly cable loss includes loss of the coaxial cable with connectors. The
maximum dB loss allowed from the transponder to the antenna is 2.0 dB.
[2] Measured from center of an existing UAT/1090 Antenna to the center of transponder antenna.
Examples of the recommended antenna cable vendors and cable types are shown in table 3-19. Cable types
shown are for reference only. Any standard 50 Ω, double-shielded coaxial cable assemblies that meet
attenuation requirements (with connectors) and airworthiness requirements can be used. A loss of 0.2 dB
can be used for each connection when calculating cable loss. Cable that meets specifications in table 3-19
are satisfactory for GTX 3X5 installations.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 3-15
Table 3-19 Coaxial Cable Specifications
Insertion Loss (dB/100ft) [1] Carlisle IT Type [2] MIL-C-17 Type RG Type [3]
18.5 N/A M17/128-RG400 RG-400
11.1 N/A M17/112-RG304 RG-304
9.2 N/A M17/127-RG393 RG-393
15.2 3C142B N/A N/A
9.2 311601 N/A N/A
7.5 311501 N/A N/A
5.8 311201 N/A N/A
3.8 310801 N/A N/A
[1] RG type coaxial cable insertion loss can change significantly between manufacturers. The
insertion loss for RG type cables shown in this column is considered the worst case
scenario. Refer to the cable manufacturer's specification sheet for actual attenuation
(insertion loss) for the cable being used.
[2] Supplier information (for reference only):
Carlisle IT:
5300 W. Franklin Drive Franklin, WI 53132
Tel: 800-327-9473
www.carlisle.com
[3] RG types are obsolete and are reference only and replaced by M17 type numbers.

Table 3-20 Typical Cable Connector Loss


Connector Type Approximate dB Loss
TNC 0.08 dB
BNC 0.20 dB
C 0.15 dB

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 3-16
3.11.2 GPS Antenna

NOTE
For combination antennas, the recommended distance of two feet or more is not
applicable to the distance between the antenna elements (e.g., GPS and COM, GPS and
SiriusXM) if the antenna is TSO authorized and has been tested to meet Garmin’s
minimum performance standards.

Antenna performance is important to operation of GTX 3X5 transponder with optional internal GPS/SBAS
receiver. SBAS/GPS antennas listed in table 3-21 meet minimum performance requirements. No changes
are required to existing Garmin GPS antennas listed in table 3-21 if they were installed per GA 35, GA 36,
and GA 37 Antenna Installation Instructions.
The rotorcraft EMC check, part of the system performance checkout detailed in section 7, can show if
there is a degradation of GPS in the presence of interference signals. A GPS notch filter in line with the
VHF COM or (re-radiating) ELT transmitter can correct unsatisfactory interference, or a different GPS
antenna.
GPS antenna location criteria are listed in order of importance:
1. As close to level as possible, or close to waterline reference for weight and balance if normal flight
attitude is not known.
2. Location must minimize the effects of airframe shadowing during typical maneuvers.
3. No closer than two feet from any VHF COM antenna, or any other antennas emitting more than 25
watts of power.
4. Preferably 12-inch away from other antennas center-to-center, but no closer than 9-inch center-to-
center.
5. No closer than 3 inches from the windscreen to maintain a constant gain pattern and limit
degradation by the windscreen.
6. Not attached in a straight line with other antennas (from the front to the rear of the fuselage) to
minimize risk of damage to all antennas due to single lightning strike.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 3-17
Table 3-21 GTX 3X5 GPS Antennas
Model Description Connector Type Manufacturer Part Number
GA 35, GPS/SBAS TNC Garmin 013-00235-( )
GA 36, GPS/SBAS TNC Garmin 013-00244-( )
GA 37, GPS/SBAS/XM TNC Garmin 013-00245-( )
A33W, WAAS TNC Garmin 013-00261-( )
GPS/VHF TNC/BNC Comant CI-2580-200
GPS/VHF TNC/BNC Comant CI-2728-200
GPS/XM/VHF TNC/TNC/BNC Comant CI-2580-410
GPS/XM/VHF TNC/TNC/BNC Comant CI-2728-410
GPS/WAAS TNC Comant CI-428-200
GPS/XM TNC/TNC Comant CI-428-410
If the existing GPS antenna installation has not been previously shown to meet ADS-B Out performance
requirements, it needs to have position source checked prior to installation of the GTX 3X5 to verify it is
adequate for ADS-B Out performance.

NOTE
The position source check is not required if the existing GPS antenna was installed at
model specific antenna locations detailed in section 3.11.3 and appendix D (for some
models).

NOTE
The position source check is not a substitute for the post-installation in-flight check with
FAA ground system described in section 7.4. This position source check is to identify any
issues with the existing GPS antenna installation prior to any modifications to the
rotorcraft.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 3-18
Use the GPS Status page on the GTN 6XX/7XX or the GNS 400W/500W navigator that will interface to
the GTX 3X5 to monitor parameters. Perform flight maneuvers detailed in section 7.4, verifying that the
parameters identified in table 3-22 are within the required limits during each maneuver.
To reduce or eliminate signal interference, signal loss of GPS antenna cable assembly, including
connectors and adapters (e.g., TNC to BNC), must be within the limits listed in table 3-23. Typical loss of
0.2 dB can be used for each connection.

Table 3-22 GPS Antenna Position Source Check Parameters


Parameter Required Value
GPS Solution (GTN)/Status (GNS) 3D DIFF NAV
HFOM < 304 ft (<93 m)

NOTE
It may take several minutes to obtain a 3D DIFF NAV GPS solution. If the parameters
identified in table 3-22 are not within the required limits during each maneuver, there may
be an issue with the existing GPS system installation which must be resolved prior to any
modifications to the rotorcraft.

To maintain integrity of the WAAS signal, the GPS antenna coaxial cable must have a minimum of two
shields (e.g., RG-400 or RG-142B). A 6.5 foot section of RG-142B or RG-400 cable with a connector on
each end has approximately 1.5 dB loss, so RG-142B or RG 400 can be used for a maximum 35 feet
antenna cable length. Use 50 ohm coaxial cable for longer cable sections. For very short cables with less
than 1.5 dB loss, cable length must be increased until the loss is within 1.5 dB and 6.5 dB, and extra cable
coiled. Susceptibility to harmonics of VHF COM transmitters is analyzed through the post installation
checkout, as detailed in section 7. GPS and COM antennas may require greater separation distance, if
problems occur. A 1575.42 MHz notch filter installed in series with VHF COM transceiver antenna cable
can decrease or eliminate the harmonic interference. A notch filter for this use (P/N 330-00067-00) is
available from Garmin. On the selected frequencies, as listed in section 7.3, the ELT can be a source of
VHF COM transmitter interference with GPS signal. The ELT antenna cable must be disconnected from
the ELT unit to verify. Consult the ELT manufacturer if the ELT is found to cause the problem.

Table 3-23 GPS dB Loss Allowance


Unit Minimum Maximum
GTX 3X5 Internal GPS 1.5 dB 6.5 dB

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 3-19
3.11.3 Model Specific GPS Antenna Installation

NOTE
This information is provided as guidance only.

The following rotorcraft models will require a flight check per section 3.11.2 to verify the GPS antenna
location is adequate and a post installation flight check per section 7.4. For rotorcraft models on the AML
but not listed in table 3-24, refer to appendix D for acceptable GPS antenna locations that do not require a
flight check.

Table 3-24 Helicopter Models Requiring a Flight Check


Manufacturer Model
EC 120B
EC 135P1
EC 135T1
EC 135P2
EC 135T2
EC 135P2+
EC 135T2+
Airbus Helicopters AS 355E
AS 355F
AS 355F1
AS 355F2
AS 355N
AS 355NP
EC 130B4
EC 130T2
206A
206L
206L-1
206L-3
Bell
206L-4
407
427
429
369D
369E
369F
MD Helicopters, Inc.
369FF
500N
600N
269C
Sikorsky 269C-1
269D

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 3-20
3.12 Standard Practices
3.12.1 Audio Interference
Coupled interference can affect audio system cables when they are placed near large AC electric fields, AC
voltage sources, and pulse equipment (e.g., strobes, spark plugs, magnetos, EL displays, CRTs, etc.).
Magnetic induction can also cause audio system cable Interference when placed near large AC current
conductors or switched DC equipment (e.g., heaters, solenoids, fans, autopilot servos, etc.).
Electrical ground loops are caused when there is more than one path in which return currents flow or when
signal returns have the same path as large currents from other equipment. These large currents make
differences in ground potential between the different equipment operating in the aircraft, which in turn can
produce an additive effect on audio panel input signals. Audio panels can receive the input signal plus an
unwanted component from ground differentials, a common cause of alternator-related interference.
Effects from coupled interference and electrical ground loops must be kept to a minimum. Audio line
shields must be continuous from end-to-end and grounded at only one end to eliminate a potential ground
loop injection point. All shields must have continuity at any intermediate connectors used unless specified
differently. The interconnect diagrams in appendix B are designed to minimize interference effects and
must be followed closely.
If wiring from the GTX goes to a unit that uses overbraided wires, then the wiring added to that unit must
also be overbraided. If the wiring passes through bulkhead connectors then each segment must be
overbraided and the overbraid must be grounded at both ends. The overbraid must be terminated as close to
the connector as possible, unless the equipment installation requires differently.
Shield termination at non-Garmin equipment end must be as short as possible and must not exceed three
inches in length. In absence of equipment manufacturer requirements, shields can be connected to the
metal connector of the connector backshell when the backshell is grounded to airframe chassis ground.
Alternatively, the shield termination can be directly connected to airframe chassis ground.
3.12.2 Cable and Wiring
Wire selection must be in accordance with types listed in section 3 and interconnect diagrams in appendix
B, or alternatively in accordance with AC 43.13-1B chapter 11, sections 5 through 7. Added wiring must
follow existing installed wire harness and be installed in accordance with the model specific Rotorcraft
Standard Practice Manual, or alternatively in accordance with AC 43.13-1B chapter 11, sections 8
through 13.
To prevent damage to the aircraft and systems, when adding new wires, or modifying existing harness:
1. The wire harness must be located in a protected area of the aircraft.
2. The wire harness must not be located near moving parts of flight control system, high electrical
capacity lines or fuel/oil lines.
3. Wire harness or cables must not be routed near high-energy sources, and must not come in contact
with sources of high heat, EMI, or RF interference.
4. Antennas, cables, and wiring interfaced to the GTX transponder system must not be installed in
fuel bays.
5. Sharp bends must be avoided and ample space provided for wire harness and connectors.
6. Before operating the equipment, antenna cable connectors must be visually inspected for proper
connections.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 3-21
3.12.2.1 Shield Termination Considerations
Shield termination at non-Garmin equipment end must be as short as possible and must not exceed three
inches in length or the length requirement of the existing non-Garmin equipment installation. When there
are no requirements given by the manufacturer’s installation manual, the shields can be connected to the
metal connector backshell when the backshell is grounded to airframe chassis ground.
Alternatively, the shield termination can be directly connected to airframe chassis ground. All shields must
have continuity at any intermediate connectors used unless specified differently. Audio line shields should
be continuous from end-to-end and be grounded at only one end to prevent ground loops. The interconnect
diagrams, and accompanying notes in appendix B, should be closely followed to minimize interference
effects.
If wiring from the GTX goes to a unit that uses overbraided wires then the new wiring to the unit must also
be overbraided end to end. If the wiring passes through bulkhead connectors then each segment must be
overbraided and the overbraid must be grounded at both ends of each segment unless instructed differently
in the equipment’s installation manual. The overbraid must be terminated as close to the connector as
possible and in accordance with manufacturer’s installation requirements. This overbraided cable will be
ran separately but tied to the same existing overbraid bundle as much as possible.
The following additional requirements applies when interfacing with light critical equipment.
1. The GTX cannot interface to equipment that is the source of AHRS data to an autopilot or Stability
Augmentation System.
2. When the GTX connects to an EFS 40/50 or AHRS (does not interface to AFCS or SAS) or Air
Data and is used to display ATT/ALT/AS on a Primary Flight Display in an IFR aircraft then, the
wires added by this STC for these units must be additionally protected with double shielded
MIC-C-27500 cable. Both the inner and outer shield must be grounded at both ends of each
segment. If there is an existing over braid in the aircraft for wiring to the EFS 40/50/AHRS/Air
Data then overbraid must be added to the double shielded cable.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 3-22
3.12.3 Electrical Bonding and Ground Plane Requirements

NOTE
The reconditioned value in table 3-25 is for installation. During service life checks, the
periodic test value is used. If the maintenance check shows resistance above the periodic
test value, the bonding must be improved to reach the reconditioned value.

Electrical equipment chassis, shield/ground terminations, antennas, supporting brackets, and racks must be
electrically bonded to the rotorcraft's ground reference as shown in table 3-25 or applicable aircraft
manufacturer’s technical documentation to achieve electrical bond. The electrical bond must achieve direct
current (DC) resistance less than or equal to the reconditioned value shown in table 3-25 for the rotorcraft
type and model.
For some rotorcraft the instrument panel is attached with vibration mounts. For these rotorcraft it must be
verified that the vibration-isolated instrument panel is grounded to the airframe metallic structure with a
bonding jumper the same or equivalent to the following specification. If a jumper is not installed, a
bonding strap with this criteria must be installed:
 The cross sectional area of the strap must be greater than 0.016 sq inches (approx 20800 circular
mils). A 7/16-inch or wider tubular braid (QQB575R30T437, 24120 circular mils) or a ¾-inch or
wider flat braid (QQB575F36T781, 20,800 circular mils) must be used.
 The strap length must be as short as possible and must not exceed five inches in length. Detailed
design of a bonding strap meeting these requirements as shown in appendix A.
Electrical bonding must be verified by inspection using a calibrated milliohm meter. Refer to section 3.3.
An equivalent OEM procedure can also be substituted.
Brackets installed to the main aircraft metallic structure with four or more rivets can provide sufficient
electrical bond to allow equipment chassis or install rack to be bonded to the bracket.
The correct material finish is important when mating untreated or bare dissimilar metals. Materials must be
galvanically-compatible. When corrosion protection is removed to make an electrical bond, any exposed
area after the bond must be protected again.
Additional guidance is found in AC 43.13-1B and SAE ARP 1870. Refer to figure 3-2, figure 3-3, and
figure 3-4 for typical electrical bonding preparation examples.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 3-23
Table 3-25 Ground Plane Definitions and Ground Path Resistance Requirements
Maximum Resistance Between
GTX Chassis and Ground
Installation Ground Reference
Reference (mΩ)
Periodic Reconditioned
Metal Nearby Metal Structure 10.0 2.5
Composite Nearby Metal Structure 50.0 25.0

LOCK WASHER
E-BOND PREP
FLAT WASHER 0.50

Figure 3-2 Electrical Bond Preparation - Nut Plate

LOCK WASHER
E-BOND PREP
FLAT WASHER 0.50

FLAT WASHER
E-BOND PREP
LOCK NUT

Figure 3-3 Electrical Bond Preparation - Bolt/Nut Joint

LOCK WASHER
FLAT WASHER
E-BOND PREP
0.50

FLAT WASHER

Figure 3-4 Electrical Bond Preparation - Terminal Lug

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 3-24
3.12.4 Aluminum Surface Preparation
This general procedure is recommended to prepare an aluminum surface for correct electrical bonding.
1. Clean grounding location with solvent.
2. Remove non-conductive films or coatings from the grounding location.
3. Apply a chemical conversion coat such as Alodine 1200 to the bare metal.
4. When the chemical conversion coat is dry, clean the area.
5. Install bonding equipment at grounding location.
6. After the bond is complete, if any films or coatings were removed from the surface, reapply a film
or coating of original finish to the surrounding area.
Refer to SAE ARP1870 Sections 5.1 and 5.5 for a more detailed procedure.
3.12.5 Antenna Bonding

CAUTION
If the antenna is struck by lightning, the foil by itself may not be sufficient to dissipate
lightning currents. Additional protection may be needed depending on the construction of
the structure to which the antenna is attached.

NOTE
For nonmetallic rotorcraft, the ground plane can be constructed from heavy duty
aluminum foil tape, such as 3M P/N 438, 3M P/N 436, or other adhesive backed dead soft
foil 7.2 mils or thicker.

Antenna ground plane must meet the following requirements:


1. The antenna baseplate must be electrically bonded to the ground plane with a direct current (DC)
resistance less than or equal to 2.5 mΩ.
2. Unless it is necessary to meet the bonding requirement, the paint on the outside of the rotorcraft
skin under the footprint of the antenna baseplate must not be removed.
3. For rotorcraft with non-metallic skin, the transponder antenna must have a minimum 12 inch
radius around the perimeter of the antenna, as shown in figure 3-5. The GPS antenna must have a
minimum 7.5 inch radius around the perimeter of the antenna, as shown in figure 3-6. For
rotorcraft with metallic skin, the surrounding skin section to which the antenna is attached makes a
suitable ground plane.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 3-25
TRANSPONDER ANTENNA
GROUND PLANE

M
INIMU
12.0 M

REF. ANTENNA, BLADE, DME/XPDR, 960-1220 MHZ, BNC


CONNECTOR, COBHAM

Figure 3-5 Transponder Antenna Ground Plane

GPS ANTENNA
GROUND PLANE

NIMUM
7.5 MI

REF. GPS WAAS/XM ANTENNA, ARINC, GA37

Figure 3-6 GPS/SBAS Antenna Ground Plane

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 3-26
3.13 Electrical Load Analysis
Before the GTX is installed, an electrical load analysis (ELA) must be completed for each rotorcraft to
make sure the electrical system is adequate. The purpose of the ELA is to show compliance with 14 CFR
27.1351 by demonstrating that the maximum electrical system demand does not exceed 80% of the
alternator data plate rating. Satisfactory completion of the ELA must be recorded on FAA Form 337. GTX
3X5 current draw values are listed in table 1-4.
Net change to the electrical load with the GTX installed must be determined. Net decrease in electrical
load requires no further analysis, assuming that the electrical system is within limits. This is likely to occur
when existing equipment is removed, or older systems are replaced with newer equipment that requires
less power to operate. The amended electrical load calculation documenting load reduction should be filed
with other rotorcraft permanent records.
A complete electrical load analysis must be performed to show adequate capacity of the alternator/
generator if the electrical load is increased with GTX 3X5 installed. ASTM F 2490-05, Standard Guide for
Aircraft Electrical Load and Power Source Capacity Analysis offers guidance on preparing an ELA.
Alternatively, electrical loads under different operating conditions can be measured, as discussed in
section 3.13.1.
3.13.1 Measurement of Electrical Loads

CAUTION
To avoid damage to equipment, ammeter must be capable of handling the anticipated
load.

CAUTION
The Pitot heat must only be switched on long enough to take the current measurement and
then switched off. The Pitot probe can get hot so care must be exercised to avoid burns or
damaging the unit.

NOTE
Normal operation is when the primary electrical power generating system is operating
normally. Emergency operation is when the primary electrical power generating system is
inoperative.

It must be shown that the maximum electrical demand for each alternator does not exceed 80% of the
alternator data plate rating. ELA for a single alternator/single battery electrical system determined by load
measurement is discussed in this section. It must be modified accordingly for rotorcraft with multiple
batteries or alternators. During measurement, applied electrical system loads must account for
combinations and durations probable in rotorcraft operation.
Current measurement is best accomplished with an in-circuit or clamp-on, calibrated ammeter with 0.5 A,
or better precision. Continuous rate, as indicated on alternator and battery data plate/nameplate must be
noted.
1. The tabulated form provided in figure 3-8 can be used to compile a list of electrical loads on the
rotorcraft. Typically the list would be comprised of existing circuit breakers and circuit breaker
switches, as shown by example in figure 3-9. Continuous (e.g., GPS) or intermittent (e.g., stall
warning horn, landing gear) loads must be identified.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 3-27
2. Worst-case flight scenario must be used to identify which equipment is used in a particular phase
of flight in normal operation. From mutually exclusive equipment that will not be energized
simultaneously (e.g., pitot heat and air conditioning), only the highest worst-case condition loads
must be considered.
3. Worst-case flight scenario must be used to identify which equipment is used in a particular phase
of flight in emergency operation. As a minimum the list of equipment must include:
[1] COM radio #1
[2] NAV radio #1
[3] Transponder and associated altitude source
[4] Audio panel
[5] Stall warning system (if applicable)
[6] Pitot heat
[7] Landing light (switched on during landing only)
[8] Instrument panel dimming

4. Ammeter must be connected in line between the external power source and the master relay circuit
to eliminate errors from charging current drawn by the battery, as shown in figure 3-7.
5. With all circuit breakers closed, external power must be applied to the aircraft and voltage set to
nominal alternator voltage (usually 13.8 VDC or 27.5 VDC).
6. Battery master switch must be turned on. For short duration demand battery is assumed to supply
power beyond alternator capacity (intermittent electrical loads are not measured).
7. The following lighting settings must applied throughout entire electrical load measurement:
[1] All instrument panel and flood lights set to maximum brightness
[2] Any other backlit display set to 50% brightness
8. With all equipment used continuously in taxiing phase switched on, ammeter current reading must
be recorded in tabulated ELA form (column 1, figure 3-8). Note that the autopilot circuit breaker
must be closed, but autopilot not be engaged during the measurement.
9. With all equipment used continuously in the normal takeoff/landing phase, ammeter current
reading must be recorded in tabulated ELA form (column 2, figure 3-8). Measurements must be
taken with the landing lights ON and OFF, and autopilot circuit breaker closed with autopilot
engaged.
10. With all equipment used continuously in the normal cruise phase, ammeter current reading must be
recorded in tabulated ELA form (column 3, figure 3-8).
11. With all equipment used continuously in the emergency cruise phase, ammeter current reading
must be recorded in tabulated ELA form (column 4, figure 3-8). Measurements must be taken with
the landing lights ON and OFF.
12. With all equipment used continuously in the emergency landing phase, ammeter current reading
must be recorded in tabulated ELA form (column 5, figure 3-8). Measurements must be taken with
the landing lights ON and OFF.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 3-28
EXTERNAL ALTNTR
POWER

ELECTRICAL BUS
+
25 Ammeter placement – either
BATTERY location acceptable (does not
- include battery charging current)
MASTER
RELAY

Figure 3-7 Ammeter Placement for Current Measurements


The rotorcraft electrical system is adequate for a GTX 3X5 installation if maximum demand, as
documented on the tabulated ELA form, does not exceed 80% of the alternator capacity as installed. It is
permissible for the electrical load to exceed 80% of the alternator capacity as installed when Pitot heat and
landing light are switched on simultaneously during the takeoff/landing phase of flight. In this case the
electrical load must not exceed 95% of the alternator capacity as installed. With only the Pitot heat on (and
the landing light off), the electrical load may not exceed 80% of the alternator capacity as installed.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 3-29
ELECTRICAL LOAD TABULATION FORM

Date: Tail Number: Phase(s) of flight during which circuit/system is used


Normal Operation Emergency Operation
Circuit
Breaker Operating Taxiing TO/Land Cruise Cruise Land
Circuit/System Number Time 10 min 10 min 60 min (Calculated) 10 min

Figure 3-8 GTX Electrical Load Tabulation Form


Sheet 1 of 2

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 3-30
ELECTRICAL LOAD TABULATION FORM (CONTINUED)

Date: Tail Number: Phase(s) of flight during which circuit/system is used


Normal Operation Emergency Operation
Circuit
Breaker Operating Taxiing TO/Land Cruise Cruise Land
Circuit/System Number Time 10 min 10 min 60 min (Calculated) 10 min

Ldg Lt ON
(b1)
Total current used (amps):
(a) (c) (d) (e)
Ldg Lt OFF
(b2)

÷ Alternator rating (amps):

%
Ldg Lt ON
(< 95%)
x 100% = Percent of alternator capacity used: % % N/A N/A
(< 80%) (< 80%)
%
Ldg Lt OFF
(< 80%)

Pass/Fail:
Notes:

Figure 3-8 GTX Electrical Load Tabulation Form


Sheet 2 of 2

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 3-31
ELECTRICAL LOAD TABULATION FORM

Date: Tail Number: NXMPL1 Phase(s) of flight during which circuit/system is used
Normal Operation Emergency Operation
Circuit
Breaker Operating Taxiing TO/Land Cruise Cruise Land
Circuit/System Number Time 10 min 10 min 60 min (Calculated) 10 min

Alternator Field A1 Continuous


Annunciator Panel C1 Continuous
Vacuum Warning C2 Intermittent
Stall Warning C3 Intermittent
Gear Warning C4 Intermittent
Gear Actuator C5 Intermittent
Cluster Gauge D1 Continuous
Ignition D2 Intermittent
PFD D3 Continuous
Turn Coordinator D4 Continuous
Gear Relay D5 Intermittent
ADC E1 Continuous
Panel Lights E2 Continuous
Glareshield Lights E3 Continuous
AHRS E4 Continuous
Flap Actuator E5 Intermittent
COM 1 F1 Continuous
GPS/NAV 1 F2 Continuous
COM 2 F3 Continuous
GPS/NAV 2 F4 Continuous
Autopilot F5 Continuous
Audio Panel G1 Conts. [1]
Radio Blower G2 Continuous
ADF G3 Continuous
Transponder G4 Continuous
GDL 69 H1 Continuous
TCAD H2 Continuous
JPI Engine Monitor H3 Continuous
Bose Headsets H5 Continuous
Altitude Encoder J1 Continuous
Strobe Light SW1 Continuous
Navigation Lights SW2 Continuous
Recognition Lights SW3 Continuous
Landing Light SW4 Continuous

Pitot Heat SW5 Continuous

Figure 3-9 GTX Electrical Load Tabulation Form (Sample)


Sheet 1 of 2

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 3-32
ELECTRICAL LOAD TABULATION FORM (CONTINUED)

Date: Tail Number: NXMPL1 Phase(s) of flight during which circuit/system is used
Normal Operation Emergency Operation
Circuit
Breaker Operating Taxiing TO/Land Cruise Cruise Land
Circuit/System Number Time 10 min 10 min 60 min (Calculated) 10 min

Elevator Trim SW6 Intermittent


Boost Pump SW7 Intermittent


Ldg Lt ON
(b1)
Total current used (amps):    
(a)  (c) (d) (e)
Ldg Lt OFF
(b2)

÷ Alternator rating (amps): 

8 %
Ldg Lt ON
(< 95%)
x 100% = Percent of alternator capacity used:  %  % N/A N/A
(< 80%)  (< 80%)
%
Ldg Lt OFF
(< 80%)

Pass/Fail: Pass Pass Pass


Notes:
[1] During taxi phase, the Autopilot circuit breaker is closed but the autopilot is not engaged.

Figure 3-9 GTX Electrical Load Tabulation Form (Sample)


Sheet 2 of 2

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 3-33
3.13.2 Battery Capacity Analysis
If the GTX 3X5 installation is found to increase in electrical load, the capacity of rotorcraft reserve battery
must be verified. The capacity of the existing battery is adequate if it support loads essential to continued
safe flight and landing, otherwise it must be replaced with a battery that has sufficient capacity. More
information can be found in ASTM document F 2490 - 05, Standard Guide for Aircraft Electrical Load
and Power Source Capacity Analysis.
For Category A rotorcraft, where the electrical load is increased due to the installation of the GTX 3X5
transponder, the transponder must be installed on a non-essential bus that is load shed during power
generation failures.
Verification of battery capacity can be accomplished following these steps:
a) 75% of the battery capacity (as indicated on battery nameplate) is assumed available.
For example, 12A-h = 720A-min, therefore 720 A-min X 75% = 540 A-min.
b) Worst case cruise condition (cruise at night) during normal operation is assumed with 5 min-
utes given to the pilot to shed non-essential loads. Any automatic load shedding can be consid-
ered immediate and need not be considered in the calculations. For example, 15 A X 5 min =
75 A-min.
c) Minimum load necessary to maintain flight in cruise after the generator/alternator has failed
needs to be determined. For example, 10 A.
d) Electric load during the approach and landing with failed generator/alternator needs to be
determined. For example, 20 A for 5 min = 100 A-min.
Battery capacity expressed in duration is:
Battery Capacity – Normal
(a) – (b) + (d)
+ Landing Load
=
Cruise Load (c)

540 A-min – 75 A-min + 100 A-min


=

10 A

= 365 A-min

10 A

= 36.5 min

Figure 3-10 Battery Capacity Analysis Example

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 3-34
4 INSTALLATION
4.1 GTX 3X5 Unit Installation ...............................................................................................................4-1
4.1.1 GAE Installation.........................................................................................................................4-3
4.1.2 Configuration Module Installation .............................................................................................4-4
4.2 Electrical Installation ........................................................................................................................4-7
4.3 Weight and Balance ........................................................................................................................4-11
4.4 RFMS Completion..........................................................................................................................4-12

4.1 GTX 3X5 Unit Installation

NOTE
The GTX 3X5 unit must be electrically bonded to the rotorcraft airframe ground or
metallic structure. Electrical bond requirements can restrict unit location.

NOTE
An additional three inches of space is required behind the unit backplate for connectors
and wiring harness.
There are multiple options to mount the GTX 3X5 transponder unit. Panel mounted units can be installed
in designated space of rotorcraft instrument panel, instrument panel support, or avionics console.
Examples of typical installation of panel mounted unit and unit dimensions are shown in appendix A,
including the size of the required cutout for unit installation in rotorcraft instrument panel.
If defined and indicated by a placard or published in rotorcraft documentation, weight limits for equipment
installed in the instrument panel or console need to be taken into account when adding the GTX 3X5 unit.
Unit installation may include replacement of the existing transponder. Other requirements applicable to
new or existing transponder installations are:
1. The GTX 3X5 unit install rack is attached to the rotorcraft structure with 4 (four) fasteners at the
front of the rack (2 per side), and 2 (two) fasteners at the back of the rack (1 per side). When
installed, the unit rack must not be deformed and the fastener heads recessed into rack countersunk
fastener holes. Fasteners are specified in the drawing in appendix A.
2. When drilling fastener holes in existing brackets, added holes must maintain a minimum 2d edge
distance (d is fastener diameter) from bracket edges and 3d edge distance from existing holes. If
the added holes do not meet this criteria, new brackets need to be procured from rotorcraft
manufacturer, or fabricated in accordance with model specific rotorcraft standard practices
manual, or structural repair manual. Alternatively, the replacement bracket shall:
a. Use the same material and have the same thickness as existing bracket. 2024-T3 aluminum per
AMS-QQ-A-250/5, or 6061-T6 aluminum per AMS 4025, AMS 4027, or AMS-QQ-A-250/11
can be used if material used in construction of the existing bracket is not known.
b. Be chemical conversion coated per MIL-DTL-5541 Type II, or MIL-DTL-81706 Type II, and
primed with high-solids chemical and solvent resistant epoxy primer per MIL-PRF-23377,
Class N, if corrosion protection methods are not specified by models specific rotorcraft
standard practices manual.
3. GTX 3X5 units do not require additional cooling, but in case cooling fan is installed to force air
through, existing support brackets must not obstruct free air circulation through vent on the side of
the unit.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 4-1
Remote units can be mounted on existing shelf designated by the rotorcraft manufacturer for equipment
installation. When there is a weight limit for equipment installed on existing shelf (as referenced by a
placard or in rotorcraft records), combined weight of GTX 335R/345R unit (including rack and backplate
with connectors) and the weight of the existing equipment already installed must remain within the limit.
Examples of typical remote mounted unit installation and unit dimensions are shown in appendix A. Other
requirements applicable to GTX 3X5R installation are:
1. Base of GTX 3X5R unit rack is attached to rotorcraft structure with 6 (six) fasteners. When
installed, base of unit rack must not be deformed and fastener heads recessed into rack
countersunk fastener holes. Fasteners are specified in the drawing in appendix A.
2. When drilling fastener holes in existing shelf, added holes must maintain minimum 2d edge
distance (d is fastener diameter) from shelf edges and 3d edge distance from existing holes. If
added holes do not meet this criteria, new shelf need to be procured from rotorcraft manufacturer,
or fabricated in accordance with model specific standard practices manual, or structural repair
manual, if allowed.
3. Connection of existing metallic equipment shelf to rotorcraft airframe ground may require
installation of bonding strap. Strap installation details are shown in appendix A.
4. Existing equipment shelf made from non-metallic/non-conductive materials requires addition of
conductive aluminum foil. Foil must not be in direct contact with shelf made from carbon fiber
reinforced plastic without insulation or other non-conductive coating. Foil installation details are
shown in appendix A.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 4-2
4.1.1 GAE Installation
Installation of the optional Garmin Altitude Encoder requires connection to the rotorcraft static pressure
source. Rotorcraft with multiple independent static systems and two transponders must have each
transponder connected to a different static system. The GAE has 1/8-27 ANPT female connection port.
Added static line connections to the GAE must:
1. Use line and fitting identical to those specified in model specific illustrated parts catalog and
purchased from rotorcraft manufacturer. Lines and fittings must be clear from fluid, sealant, or
particles, and have no leaks when installed. Added line must be labeled near the GAE unit.
2. Be routed away from moving parts of the control system and high temperature lines and avoid
sharp bends. The GAE must not be the low point in the added line to avoid moisture collection at
or near the unit.
3. Not change the effectiveness of existing drains, alternate static source selector switch (if
applicable), or the independence of dual static systems (if applicable).
4. Not modify the static port surface or rotorcraft surface near the static port, and introduce changes
that would affect static system calibration.
Connection of the GAE four conductor wire harness to the GTX 3X5 connector (P3251) is shown in
appendix B. Drawings in appendix A detail the installation of the GAE to the GTX 3X5 backplate
assembly.

Table 4-1 Garmin Altitude Encoder Kit, P/N 011-03080-00


Description P/N QTY
Sub-assembly, Garmin altitude encoder, unit only 011-03080-01 1
Screw, 4-40 x .250, PHP, SS/P with nylon 211-60234-08 2
Screw, 4-40 x .250, FLHP 100, SS/P, nylon 211-63234-08 2
Harness, 4 cond, GAE 12 325-00421-00 1

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 4-3
4.1.2 Configuration Module Installation
Connection of the configuration module wire harness to GTX 3X5 connector (P3251) is shown in
appendix B. Assembly of configuration module harness is shown in figure 4-1.
1. Strip 0.17 in. of insulation from each wire.
2. Crimp pin contacts (3) onto each wire.
3. Contacts with wires (2, 3) shall be inserted into GTX 3X5 connector (P3251).
4. Wire harness (2) shall be plugged into the connector on the PCB board (1) and board inserted into
the backshell recess.

Table 4-2 Configuration Module Kit, P/N 011-00979-03


Item Description P/N QTY
1 Configuration module, PCB board assembly w/EEPROM 011-02178-00 1
2 4-Conductor harness 325-00122-00 1
3 Pin contact, crimp, #22D 336-00021-00 4

Figure 4-1 Configuration Module Assembly

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 4-4
Table 4-3 Standard Mount Backplate Assembly
Item Description P/N QTY
1 DCP, connector plate, GTX 3X5, with secondaries 125-00307-10 1
2 Conn, male/female special BNC 330-00053-01 1
3 Washer, shoulder, GNC400 212-00022-00 2
4 Conn, M/F, spec, BNC/TNC 330-00053-02 1
5 Screw, 4-40x.250, PHP, SS/P, w/nylon 211-60234-08 4

3 NUTS SUPPLIED
2 WITH ITEMS 2 & 4
1

5
4

Figure 4-2 Backplate Assembly P/N 011-02976-01

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 4-5
Table 4-4 Vertical Mount Backplate Assembly
Item Description P/N QTY
1 DCP, connector plate, remote, GTX 3X5, w/secondaries 125-00343-10 1
2 Connector, male/female special BNC 330-00053-01 1
3 Washer, shoulder, GNC 400 212-00022-00 1
4 Connector, male/female, special, BNC/TNC 330-00053-02 1
7 Washer, centering, no float 212-00022-10 1
8 Washer, split lock, size 8 212-00018-04 2
9 Screw, captive, 8-32, .62", 3/32 hex drv 211-00290-00 2

7 NUTS SUPPLIED
WITH ITEMS 2 & 4

2 3

8 9
2 2

Figure 4-3 Backplate Assembly P/N 011-02976-11

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 4-6
4.2 Electrical Installation

NOTE
Raychem S02 Series solder sleeves with pre-installed shield drains are preferred instead
of separate shield terminators and individual wires. S02 series sleeves come with a pre-
installed lead and thermochromic temperature indicator.
The GTX 335/335R units use a single 62 pin D-Sub connector. The GTX 345/345R units use a 62 pin D-
Sub and a 15 pin D-Sub connector. Connector pin out diagrams are detailed in Section 8. Interconnect
wiring diagrams and wire requirements are defined in appendix B.
All electrical connections are made through these D-Sub connectors except for the antenna(s) and shield
ground. Shield grounds are terminated to the shield ground block attached to the backshell of the D-Sub
connectors, as shown in figure 4-4.
Shield wiring, including existing wiring, that terminates at the GTX connector(s) must be prepared as
follows:
1. Strip up to 2.5 in. of the jacket to expose the braid and remove the braid from the end of the
shielded cable.
2. Score additional 0.25 to 0.35 in of the jacket and remove it to expose braid.
3. Connect wire (20 or 22 AWG) to the exposed shield.
4. Slide shield terminator on.
5. Make a connection using heat gun. Size of solder sleeve must accommodate the number of
conductors present in the cable and the attached wire.
6. Strip 0.17 in from the end of exposed twisted wire, crimp the connector pins, and insert into
connector housing. Tug on the wire to verify the pin is engaged.
7. Install the configuration module and wires into the GTX 3X5 connector. Use appendix B for the
applicable connections and pinouts and section 8 for proper pin location in the connector housing.
8. Wrap silicone fusion tape around the cable bundle where backshell strain relief and housing touch
the cable bundle.
9. Place the smooth side of the backshell strain relief clamp across the cable bundle and secure with
supplied screws (pan head 4-40 x 0.375 in.). Avoid damaging the cable by placing concave side of
the strain relief clamp across the cable bundle.
10. Attach backshell cover with supplied screws.
11. Crimp ring terminal onto the end of shield drain.
12. Attach ring terminal to shield block on the connector backshell assembly with 8-32 x 0.312 in. pan
head screw and combination of split and regular flat washers between screw head and terminal
ring. Shield grounds can be terminated at the backshell housing using the shield block ground kit.
Note that if too long, the screws can damage the wiring.
13. Insert assembled connector into the backplate.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 4-7
Table 4-5 Shield Wire Assembly
Figure 4-4 Description Garmin P/N Notes
Multiple conductor shielded cable
1 As Required [1]
(Refer to appendix B for interconnect diagrams)
2 Wire, insulated (20-22 AWG), 3” max length As Required [1] [2]
3 Shield terminator As Required [1] [2]
4 Pin contacts, #22D 336-00021-00 [4] [5] [6]
MS25036-149
Ring terminal, #8, insulated, 18-22 AWG,14-16 AWG,
5 MS25036-153 [1] [3] [6]
12–10 AWG
MS25036-156

[1] Item not supplied in connector kits and must be purchased separately.
[2] Solder sleeve with pre-installed lead can be used instead of items 2 and 3.
[3] Not a Garmin part number.
[4] Supplied as part of sub assy connector kits for GTX 3X5.
[5] Supplied as part of GTX 335R/345R connector kits.
[6] Part not shown in figure 4-4.

2.5" MAX 3
1

0.17"
0.31" OF EXPOSED SHIELD
2

SHIELD DRAINS AS SHORT AS PRACTICAL


(NO LONGER THAN 3”)

PREFERRED METHOD

2.5" MAX 3
1

2
0.17"
0.31" OF EXPOSED SHIELD

SHIELD DRAINS AS SHORT AS PRACTICAL


(NO LONGER THAN 3”)

ALTERNATE METHOD
Figure 4-4 Shielded Wire Preparation

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 4-8
Table 4-6 GTX 3X5 Connector Kit Hardware
Figure 4-5 Description P/N QTY
1 Connector, hi-density, D-sub, mil crimp 62 ckt 330-00185-62 1
2 Sub-assembly, bkshl with hardware, 37/62 pin 011-00950-03 1
3 Sub-assembly, ground, adapter shell, 4&5 011-01169-01 1
4 Screw, 4-40x.250, FLHP 100, SS/P, w/nylon 211-63234-06 2 ea connector
5 Connector, HiDens, D-sub, mil crp,15ckt 330-00185-15 1
6 Sub-assy, bkshl with hardware, 9/15 pin 011-00950-00 1
7 Sub-assy, grnd adaptr, shell 1-3 011-01169-00 1

6
3
4
2
2 7
1 4
2
5

GTX 3X5 GTX 345/345R Only


P3251 P3252
Figure 4-5 GTX 3X5 Connector Kits

Refer to table 4-3 and table 4-4 for back plate items for the standard and vertical mounting assemblies.
Refer to figure 4-2 and figure 4-3 for the back plate assembly.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 4-9
4.3 Weight and Balance
After the GTX 3X5 installation is complete, the rotorcraft weight and balance must be verified in
accordance with procedures defined in the specific rotorcraft model’s maintenance manual. Equipment
weight, dimensions, and location of center of gravity are specified in appendix A.
The rotorcraft equipment list has to be updated to indicate items added and items removed or relocated.
Changes must be dated and include name and certificate number of person making the entry.

Table 4-7 Example Weight and Balance Calculation


Empty Weight
Previous Rotorcraft Weight and Useful Load (lbs.) (lbs.)
C.G. (in) Moment
Balance Calculated (Date)
1093.30 2306.70 138.83 320,239
Description of items removed
Weight (lbs.) Arm (in) Moment
from rotorcraft
KT 76C unit/rack 2.61 55.00 143.55
Total removed -2.61 55.00 -143.55
Description of Items Added to
Weight (lbs.) Arm (in) Moment
Rotorcraft
GTX 345 unit/rack/connector 3.12 55.00 171.60
Total added 3.12 55.00 171.60
Change .51 55.00 28.05
Useful Load
New Rotorcraft Weight and Weight (lbs.) C.G. (in) Moment
(lbs.)
Balance (date)
1092.79 2307.21 138.81 320,267

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 4-10
4.4 RFMS Completion
Using the following guidance, the installer is responsible for documenting the installation configuration of
the GTX system in section 1.4 of the GTX 3X5 RFMS. Indelible ink must be used when checking the
appropriate boxes in the RFMS.
Equipment Installed
Mark the boxes as described for Transponder #1, and for Transponder #2 for dual installation.
TYPE OF GTX TRANSPONDER INSTALLED
Mark box [1] if the installed transponder is part number 011-03300-00, 011-03300-20, or
[1] GTX 335
011-03300-40
[2] GTX 335R Mark box [2] if the installed transponder is part number 011-03301-00 or 011-03301-40
[3] GTX 345 Mark box [3] if the installed transponder is part number 011-03302-00 or 011-03302-40
[4] GTX 345R Mark box [4] if the installed transponder is part number 011-03303-00 or 011-03303-40

Interfaced GPS/SBAS Position Source


Mark the boxes as described for GPS #1, and for GPS #2 if dual GPS sources are interfaced.
GPS POSITION SOURCE(S) USED BY THE GTX TRANSPONDER(S)
Mark box [1] if the installed transponder(s) part number is 011-03300-
[1] Internal 40, 011-03301-40, 011-03302-40, or 011-03303-40, and configured to
use the internal GPS source
Mark box [2] if the installed transponder(s) is interfaced with a GTN
[2] GTN 6XX/7XX Series
6XX/7XX
Mark box [3] if the installed transponder(s) is interfaced with a GNS
[3] GNS 400W/500W Series
400W/500W

Interfaced Pressure Altitude Source


Mark the boxes as described for Pressure Altitude Source #1, and for Pressure Altitude Source #2 for dual
altitude source installations.
ALTITUDE SOURCE(S) USED BY THE GTX TRANSPONDER(S)
Mark box [1] if the installed transponder(s) is interfaced with an external
[1] __________ Pressure Altitude Source input per appendix B and appendix C of this
manual. Write the Manufacturer and Model in the space provided.
Mark box [2] if the installed transponder(s) is interfaced to Garmin
[2] Garmin Altitude Encoder
Altitude Encoder.

Interfaced Remote Control Display


Mark the boxes as described for Transponder #1, and for Transponder #2 for dual installation.
INTERFACED DISPLAY TO CONTROL REMOTELY MOUNTED TRANSPONDERS
Mark box [1] if the installed transponder is interfaced with a GTN 6XX/
[1] GTN 6XX/7XX
7XX per appendix B and appendix C of this manual.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 4-11
Interfaced Active Traffic System
The Interfaced Active Traffic System subsection describes the Mark the boxes as described.
TRAFFIC SYSTEM INTERFACED TO THE GTX FOR TRAFFIC CORRELATION
Mark box [1] if the installed transponder is not interfaced with an active
[1] None
traffic system.
[2] TCAD Mark box [2] if the installed transponder is interfaced with a 9900BX
Mark box [3] if the installed transponder is interfaced with a Garmin GTS
[3] TAS/TCAS
or L-3 Skywatch

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 4-12
5 SOFTWARE UPDATE
5.1 Software Check.................................................................................................................................5-2
5.1.1 GTX 3X5 Software Version Check ...........................................................................................5-2
5.1.2 GTX 3X5R Software Version Check (GTN 6XX/7XX) ...........................................................5-2
5.2 GTX 3X5/3X5R Software Update....................................................................................................5-3
5.2.1 GTX 3X5/3X5R Software Loading ...........................................................................................5-4

NOTE
The modifications in this section are mandatory to meet the requirements of AC 20-165A
and this STC. These modifications are applicable for ALL installations associated with
this STC.

NOTE
Screen shots in this section are provided for reference only. For current approved GTX
software versions, refer to GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Equipment List.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 5-1
5.1 Software Check
The software version must match the approved version in GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Equipment List.
DO NOT continue if the software version number does not match those specified or if the software is not
successfully loaded. Troubleshoot and resolve the issue before continuing. Do a software version check
after the software is loaded.
5.1.1 GTX 3X5 Software Version Check
1. Start the GTX 3X5 in normal mode.
2. Observe the start-up screen until you see “PRESS ENT FOR PRODUCT DATA.”

Figure 5-1 GTX 3X5 Start-Up Screen


3. Push the ENT key to go to the software version screen.
4. Make sure that the version number matches the approved version as specified in GTX 3X5 Part 27
AML STC Equipment List.

Figure 5-2 GTX 3X5 Product Data Page


5.1.2 GTX 3X5R Software Version Check (GTN 6XX/7XX)
Follow these steps to make sure the GTX 3X5R software version is correct as interfaced with the
GTN 6XX/7XX Series Navigators. Refer to the GTN 6XX/7XX Series pilot guides for more information.
1. Push the External LRUs key on the GTN 6XX/7XX System Page.
2. Observe the reported GTX software version number.
3. Make sure the version number identified is correct as specified in GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC
Equipment List.

Figure 5-3 GTN 6XX/7XX System Page

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 5-2
5.2 GTX 3X5/3X5R Software Update

CAUTION
If the unit is removed from the rotorcraft and operated, connect the transponder antenna
connection to a 50 ohm 5 watt load. The GTX transmits Mode S acquisition squitter pulses
once per second whether interrogations are received or not. Failure to connect a dummy
load or antenna during this procedure will cause the transponder to fail and possibly
damage the unit.

CAUTION
Do not de-energize the unit until “Update Complete” is shown next to all selected items.
Failure to do so could result in equipment damage.
If the unit does not have the approved version of software installed, software can be downloaded from the
Dealer Resource Center on Garmin’s website. For dual GTX installations, the software loading procedures
must be carried out on each GTX.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 5-3
5.2.1 GTX 3X5/3X5R Software Loading
1. Download the latest GTX 3X5/3X5R software from the Dealer Resource Center on Garmin’s
website.
2. Under “Step 1 - Select a File,” select the Browse key and locate the Boot Block software file
containing the GTX 3X5/3X5R software previously loaded.
3. Under “Step 2 - Upload Options,” select the options to be updated.
4. Select the Upload key.
5. Wait for the upload to complete. Individual files will be marked as complete as they are installed.
6. Under “Step 1 - Select a File,” select the Browse key and locate the Main System software file
containing the GTX 3X5/3X5R software previously downloaded.
7. Under “Step 2 - Upload Options,” select the remaining options to be updated.
8. Wait for the upload to complete. Individual files will be marked as complete as they are installed.
9. After successful completion of the update, make sure that the correct software versions and part
numbers show on the Transponder page under the Product Data group. If any software items did
not load, select those items and attempt to upload again.

Figure 5-4 GTX 3X5 Install Tool Software Upload Page

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 5-4
6 CONFIGURATION
6.1 Panel Mounted GTX 3X5 .................................................................................................................6-3
6.1.1 Audio Settings ............................................................................................................................6-3
6.1.2 Input/Output Configuration........................................................................................................6-5
6.1.3 Unit Settings .............................................................................................................................6-12
6.1.4 Display Pages (Panel Mount Units Only) ................................................................................6-13
6.1.5 Sensors .....................................................................................................................................6-15
6.1.6 Airframe ...................................................................................................................................6-20
6.1.7 Aircraft .....................................................................................................................................6-22
6.1.8 Diagnostics ...............................................................................................................................6-23
6.2 Remote GTX 3X5...........................................................................................................................6-24
6.2.1 Audio Configuration Page........................................................................................................6-25
6.2.2 Interface Configuration Pages ..................................................................................................6-26
6.2.3 Unit Configuration Page...........................................................................................................6-28
6.2.4 Display Configuration Page .....................................................................................................6-29
6.2.5 Sensor Configuration................................................................................................................6-30
6.2.6 Airframe Configuration Page ...................................................................................................6-32
6.2.7 Aircraft Configuration Page .....................................................................................................6-33
6.3 GTX 3X5 with GTN 6XX/7XX .....................................................................................................6-33
6.3.1 Transponder Remote Control ...................................................................................................6-33
6.3.2 ADS-B In Display (GTX 345 Only) ........................................................................................6-34
6.4 GTX 3X5 With GNS 400W/500W.................................................................................................6-35

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 6-1
CAUTION
Connector pins must not be misaligned or bent before GTX unit is inserted into the
mounting rack. Bent or misaligned pins will result in damage to the GTX or failed
procedures.

CAUTION
All lighting buses must be set to their lowest adjustment before the unit is energized. This
may prevent unit damage in case of wiring errors.

NOTE
If a GTX 335(R) is replaced with a GTX 345(R) or a GTX 345(R) is replaced with a
GTX 335(R), the configuration file must be saved by selecting Configuration, Save, under
the GTX tab on the Install Tool. Once the configuration is saved, Reset the configuration
under the same tab, then reload the saved configuration. Once complete the unit can
continue to be configured.

The wiring harness must be examined for correct connections to the rotorcraft systems and other avionics
equipment before the unit is installed and energized, including verification that:
1. All cables are secured and do not interfere with flight and engine controls, neither restrict their
movement.
2. Shields are connected to shield blocks of the connectors.
Point-to-point continuity, including power and ground checks, must be completed to expose any faults
such as shorting to ground or wiring discrepancies. All faults or discrepancies must be corrected and
installation rack and GTX unit verified to be correctly secured before proceeding.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 6-2
6.1 Panel Mounted GTX 3X5
System and interface settings are shown in configuration mode specific to the GTX 3X5 installation. The
configuration settings are stored in internal memory. The configuration settings are also stored in the
external configuration module, if installed. The GAE module operates as a configuration module. GTX
3X5 panel mount units are configurable from the display or the GTX 3X5 Install Tool. Refer to section 6.2
to configure GTX 3X5 panel mount units with the GTX 3X5 Install Tool.
1. Push and hold the ENT key when the unit is energized to go into configuration mode.
2. Push and hold the OFF key until the unit de-energizes to exit configuration mode.
3. Push the FUNC key to cycle through the pages.
4. Push the 8 or 9 key to scroll up or down on the page without an active field selected.
5. Push the CRSR key to access items on the page.
6. Push the 8 or 9 key to cycle through the selections of an item on the page.
7. Push the ENT key to move within the page with a field highlighted.
8. Push the CLR key to move to previous selection on the page.
9. Push the FUNC key to exit the page.
6.1.1 Audio Settings
Audio settings set the audio output, volume, and alert type
.

Figure 6-1 Audio Page 1

Figure 6-2 Audio Page 2

Figure 6-3 Audio Page 3

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 6-3
Set the GTX 3X5 audio settings per the following table.

Table 6-1 Panel Mount Audio Settings [2]


Item Configuration Notes
Audio Output XPDR Use the audio output of the transponder.
Settings can vary for user preference (use
the 8 or 9 key to adjust volume). The
interface checkout procedure in
Volume 50
section 7.1.2 must be performed to make
sure that the volume is configured to an
appropriate level.
MALE
Setting can vary for user preference.
Voice or
Default is MALE.
FEMALE
NONE Default
TONE Solid beep
Test Audio [1] MSG 1 “Leaving Altitude”
MSG 2 “Timer Expired”
MSG 3 “Traffic 12 o'clock 5 Miles”
[1] The test audio files are only used to assist while setting the appropriate volume level of the
transponder, once complete the unit automatically defaults back to NONE.
[2] All settings in this table are approved under this STC.
Altitude and Timer Expired Alert (Panel Mount Units Only)
Set the GTX 3X5 Altitude and Timer Expired Alert settings per the following table.

Table 6-2 Panel Mount Altitude and Timer Expired Alert Settings [1]
Item Configuration Notes
OFF
Setting can vary for user
ALTITUDE ALRT MESSAGE
preference.
MESSAGE W/ CHIME
OFF
Setting can vary for user
TIMER EXPIRED ALRT MESSAGE
preference.
MESSAGE W/ CHIME
[1] All settings in this table are approved under this STC.
Traffic Alert
Set the GTX 3X5 Traffic Alert per the following table.

Table 6-3 Panel Mount Traffic Alert Settings [1]


Item Configuration Notes
OFF
Setting can vary for user
TRAFFIC ALERT MESSAGE
preference.
MESSAGE W/ CHIME
[1] All settings in this table are approved under this STC.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 6-4
6.1.2 Input/Output Configuration
Configures the inputs and outputs of the RS-232, ARINC 429, discrete, and HSDB interfaces.
RS-232

Figure 6-4 RS-232 Interface Page

Sets the RS-232 interfaces for input and output formats for channels 1 through 4.

Table 6-4 RS-232 Channel Selections


Available
Selection Input/Output Description Notes
Channels
No information is transmitted or
Off Input/Output 1-4
received.
ADC FMT 1 Input 1-3 Supports Shadin G/S/Z ADC formats.
Receives/transmits necessary ADS-B
ADS-B+ FMT 1 Input/Output 1-3 [4]
GPS data at 9600 baud.
Receives/transmits necessary ADS-B
ADS-B+ FMT 2 Input/Output 1-3 [4]
GPS data at 38400 baud.
Outputs pressure altitude in 25 or 100 ft
ALT FMT 1 Output 1-3 resolution depending on the source of [1]
the data.
Supports Sandia/Icarus/ACK/TRANS-
ALT FMT 1 25 ft Input 1-3 CAL altitude format with 25 ft or lower
encoding.
Supports Sandia/Icarus/ACK/TRANS-
ALT FMT 1 100 ft Input 1-3 CAL altitude format with a parallel Gray
code source of 100 ft encoding.
Supports Shadin altitude format with 25
ALT FMT 3 25 ft Input 1-3
ft or lower encoding.
Supports Shadin altitude format with a
ALT FMT 3 100 ft Input 1-3 parallel Gray code source or 100 ft
encoding.
Supports G3X for ADS-B In weather
CONNEXT FMT 1 Input/Output 1-4 [1] [3]
and traffic.
Supports input from a Flight Stream
CONNEXT FMT 3 Input 1-4 [1] [3]
110/210.
GDL Input/Output 1-3 Supports GDL 88 interface. [1]
Supports GNS 400W/500W series
ADS-B In weather (traffic supported
GNS Input/Output 1-4 [3]
over ARINC 429). Also provides GPS
data.
Supports transponder interface to
LGCY REMOTE 1 Input/Output 1-3 [1]
Legacy G1000H.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 6-5
Available
Selection Input/Output Description Notes
Channels
Supports transponder interface and
LGCY REMOTE 2 Input/Output 1-3 [1] [2]
TIS-A traffic to Legacy G1000H.
Supports GDL 90 traffic interface to
LGCY TRAFFIC Output 1-4 [1] [3]
Legacy G950/G1000.
REMOTE FMT 1 Input/Output 1-3 Supports transponder interface to GTN.
Supports transponder interface and
REMOTE FMT 2 Input/Output 1-3 [2]
TIS-A traffic to GTN.
Outputs TIS-A traffic for non-certified
TIS-A OUT FMT Output 1-3 displays: GPSMAP 396/496/695/696, [1] [2]
G3X, and G300.
TRAFFIC FMT 4 Input/Output 4 Supports Ryan TCAD. [3]
Supports transponder interface to
XPDR FMT 1 Input/Output 1-3 [1]
GX000.
Supports transponder interface and
XPDR FMT 2 Input/Output 1-3 [1] [2]
TIS-A traffic to GX000.
[1] Format not approved for use under this STC for the GTX 3X5.
[2] Applicable for GTX 335 installations only.
[3] Applicable for GTX 345 installations only.
[4] GTX 3X5 unit with internal GPS required for output.
RS-422 Output (GTX 345 Only)

Figure 6-5 RS-422 Output Page

Table 6-5 RS-422 Output Selections


Selection Input/Output Description Notes
Off Output Information is not transmitted.
CONNEXT FMT 3 Output Supports output to Flight Stream 110/210. [1]
MX FMT 1 Output Supports GMX 200. [1]
MX FMT 2 Output Supports MX20. [1]
[1] Format is not approved for use under this STC for the GTX 3X5.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 6-6
ARINC 429

NOTE
All ARINC 429 configuration formats are available on all channels/ports.

Figure 6-6 A429 In Page

Table 6-6 ARINC 429 Inputs


Selection Description Notes
OFF Information is not received.
Receives heading, roll, pitch, and yaw information from systems with
AHRS
AHRS.
Receives altitude, airspeed, and altitude rate information from air data
ADC
systems.
ARINC 743A Receives GPS information from ARINC 743A. [1]
Receives altitude, airspeed, altitude rate, and heading information
EFIS AIR DATA
from EFIS and ADC systems.
Receives selected altitude, barometric setting, and non-standard
FLIGHT CONTROL [1]
pitch discrete data for Bendix King KFC 225.
HEADING Receives heading information.
MODE S CTRL PNL Receives ARINC 718 labels for ATCRBS Control and Flight ID. [1] [3]
RADIO ALTITUDE Receives radar altitude information.
TRAFFIC 1 Receives traffic information from Garmin GTS 8XX systems. [2]
Receives traffic information from L-3 Comm SKY497 Skywatch and
TRAFFIC 2 [2]
SKY899 Skywatch HP.
Receives traffic information from KTA 870 (KTA 810), KTA 970 (KTA
TRAFFIC 5 [1] [2]
910), KMH 880 (KMH 820), and KMH 980 (KMH 920).
[1] Format not approved for use under this STC for the GTX 3X5.
[2] Applicable to GTX 345 installations only.
[3] The Mode S Control Panel format is equivalent to the Transponder Control Format 1 in the
GTX 3X5 Install Tool.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 6-7
Figure 6-7 A429 Output Page

Table 6-7 ARINC 429 Outputs


Selection Description Notes
OFF Information is not transmitted
FORMAT 1 Mode S control panel [1]
FORMAT 2 Garmin concentrator [1]
FORMAT 3 Garmin concentrator and Mode S control panel [1]
FORMAT 4 Garmin TAS and GPS data [1]
FORMAT 5 Garmin concentrator, Garmin TAS, and GPS data [3]
FORMAT 6 Mode S control panel, Garmin TAS, and GPS data [1]
Garmin concentrator, Mode S control panel, Garmin TAS, and GPS
FORMAT 7 [1]
data
FORMAT 8 Garmin TIS-A [2]
FORMAT 9 Garmin concentrator and Garmin TIS-A [1] [2]
TRAFFIC ADS-B traffic output for GNS 400W/500W series units [3]
[1] Format not approved for use under this STC for the GTX 3X5.
[2] Applicable for GTX 335 installations only.
[3] Applicable for GTX 345 installations only.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 6-8
HSDB Interface (GTX 345 Only)
Sets the presence of specific HSDB devices interfaced to the GTX 345. Selections are YES or NO.

Figure 6-8 HSDB Interface Page

Table 6-8 HSDB Formats


Selection Description Notes
G500/G600
Select YES or NO for each selection depending on
GTN [2]
whether or not the interface is included in the
GTS
particular installation.
GX000 [1]
[1] Format not approved for use under this STC for the GTX 3X5.
[2] GTN must be set to NO to control Bluetooth connections from the GTX 345.
Discrete In
Set the function of each configurable discrete as necessary for the installation. Refer to section 8 for pinout
information.

NOTE
Any discrete input or output designated as “configurable” can be configured for any
available configurable discrete input/output unless specified otherwise.

NOTE
The source priority is based on selections made during configuration. Refer to section 3.6
for more information.

Figure 6-9 Discrete In Page

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 6-9
Table 6-9 Discrete Input Configuration
Function Selection Description
Switches between two ARINC 429 ADC sources
NONE
or two EFIS ADC sources. Source 1 and 2 are
AIR DATA set during configuration. Source 1 is used when
the discrete is open and Source 2 is used when
P3251 - 58
the discrete is grounded.
NONE
ALT DATA Selects between two pressure altitude sources.
Configurable
NONE When this discrete is grounded, the GTX audio
is muted. Connect to mute GTX for higher
AUD MUTE
Configurable priority audio, such as TAWS or TAS/TCAS
traffic when a GTX 335 is installed.
NONE When this discrete is grounded by a momentary
AUD CNCL switch, the audio alert is canceled for alerting
P3251 - 37
target.
A synchronous pulse which is sent to the other
NONE
EXTERNAL equipment to suppress transmission of a
SUPPRESSION I/O competing transmitter/receiver for the duration
P3251-18
of the transmission.

ENABLED: No Activates all ten Gillham/Gray code inputs. If this


configuration is set to “Enabled: No”, then these
GILLHAM
ENABLED: Yes discrete pins are available to be configured for
(P3251 - 10-13; 32-34; 53-55) another function that is configurable.
Selects the system ID and overrides
NONE configuration setting. GTX 1 system ID is
ID SLCT selected when this discrete is open. GTX 2
Configurable [1] system ID is selected when the discrete is
grounded.
NONE When this discrete is grounded by a momentary
IDENT
P3251 - 36 switch, the SPI activates.
NONE When this discrete is grounded, the unit will go
STANDBY
P3251 - 14 into standby mode.
This input determines the on-ground status of
SQUAT NONE
the rotorcraft. When collective is down,
(COLLECTIVE)
configure Squat switch as wired - Open (High)
SWITCH P3251 - 57
or Ground (Low).
NONE GTX 335 only. When this discrete is
TIS-A SELECT momentarily grounded, TIS-A will toggle
Configurable
between operate/standby.
[1] Only available for configurable discrete outputs on P3251.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 6-10
Discrete Out

Figure 6-10 Discrete Out Page

Table 6-10 Discrete Output Configuration


Function Selection Description
NONE When this discrete is grounded it indicates a deviation
ALT ALERT
Configurable from the preset altitude setting.
If the unit needs service soon, this discrete will switch
NONE between open and ground for the first 30 seconds after
power up. If after 30 seconds, there is no detection of
EQUIP STS
ADS-B In/Out failures the discrete opens. The discrete
Configurable will ground if any ADS-B In/Out failures are detected
after 30 seconds.
NONE
FAIL 1 Failure of transponder causes discrete to ground.
P3251 - 17
NONE
FAIL 2 Failure of transponder causes discrete to open.
Configurable
NONE Discrete grounds when transponder is replying to
RPLY ACTV
Configurable interrogations.
NONE Supports automatic control and integration with Ryan
TCAD SL TCAD and Avidyne TAS600 Series traffic systems.
Configurable Applicable to GTX 345 installations only.
NONE Commands TAS/TCAS standby/operate. Discrete output
TRFC STBY operation automatically set through TAS/TCAS Input
Configurable [1] Configuration. Applies to GTX 345 only.
NONE Commands TAS/TCAS into test mode. Applies to GTX
TRFC TEST
Configurable [1] 345 only.
NONE When a traffic alert is active, this discrete will ground.
TRFC ALRT Applies to GTX 345 only. Used for external traffic
Configurable annunciator lamp.
[1] Only available for configurable discrete outputs on P3251.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 6-11
6.1.3 Unit Settings

Figure 6-11 Unit Page

Set the GTX 3X5 UNIT settings per the following table.

Table 6-11 Panel Mount Unit Settings [2]


Item Configuration Notes
ENABLED Set to ENABLED for GTX 345 units for
FIS-B PROCESSING
DISABLED ADS-B weather data.
FLIGHT LVL
Sets both pressure and density altitude
ALTITUDE UNITS FEET
units. Setting can vary for user preference.
METERS
CELSIUS
TEMPERATURE UNITS Setting can vary for user preference.
FAHRENHEIT
1 Set as 1 for primary unit, if dual
INSTALLATION ID [1]
2 transponders installed set 2 for second unit.
Range in octal is 0000-7777. Default is
VFR ID 1200
1200.
This field determines the altitude offset from
selected altitude to generate an altitude
ALTITUDE ALERT Configurable
alert. This field is applicable only if the
DEVIATION Range is 200 ft to 999 ft
Altitude Alert configuration parameter is
selected on the Audio Configuration page.

NO Select YES to save the selected pages set


RESTORE PAGES ON in normal operating mode as the new
POWER-UP default page settings next time the unit is
YES powered on.

ENABLED
BLUETOOTH GTX 345 units only.
DISABLED
Select NO to stop the “MSG” indicator from
NO
flashing when new messages annunciate.
FLASH MESSAGE Select YES to allow the “MSG” indicator to
INDICATOR flash when new messages annunciate.
YES
“YES” is the only approved configuration
under this STC.
[1] The “ID SLCT” discrete overwrites the configuration setting.
[2] All settings in this table are approved under this STC.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 6-12
6.1.4 Display Pages (Panel Mount Units Only)

NOTE
Under night conditions, make sure the brightness levels match the lighting levels of other
equipment in the panel.

Figure 6-12 Display Pages

Set the GTX 335/345 DISPLAY settings using the following table so that the operator has adequate
illumination for day/night operations.

Table 6-12 Panel Mount Display Settings


Item Configuration Notes
PHOTCELL [1] Sets the source for the display
DISPLAY BACKLIGHT
LIGHTING BUS [2] backlight control and adjustment.
Sets the minimum brightness of
the display. The higher the
number, the brighter the minimum
MINIMUM LEVEL Range is: 0-100 [3]
brightness. Recommended
minimum level should not be
below 5.
PHOTCELL [1] Sets the source for the keypad
KEYPAD BACKLIGHT
LIGHTING BUS [2] backlight control and adjustment.
Sets the minimum brightness of
the keypad. The higher the
number, the brighter the minimum
MINIMUM LEVEL Range is: 0-100 [3]
brightness. Recommended
minimum level should not be
below 5.
Sets a point on the lighting bus.
Range is: 5-50 [3] When the lighting bus is below this
PHOTOCELL TRANSITION
Default is: 5 point, the GTX uses the photocell
to adjust the display brightness.
Sets the sensitivity of the photocell
input level. Adjusting the slope
Range is: 0-100 [3]
SLOPE higher results in a greater display
Default is: 50
brightness change for a given
increase in photocell input level.
Adjusts the lighting level up or
down for any given photocell input
Range is: 0-100 [3]
OFFSET level. Use the offset settings to
Default is: 50
match lighting curves with other
installed equipment in the panel.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 6-13
Item Configuration Notes
5 VAC
5 VDC Select the Lighting Bus voltage
LIGHTING BUS INPUT VLTG
14 VDC input used
28 VDC
Sensitivity of the display or bezel
keys for a given lighting bus input
DISPLAY AND BEZEL KEY Range is 0-100 [3] level. Set the slope higher for a
LIGHTING SLOPE Default is 50 brighter display for a given
increase in the lighting bus input
level.
Adjusts lighting level up or down
for any given lighting bus input
DISPLAY AND BEZEL KEY Range is 0-100 [2]
level. Use the offset setting to
LIGHTING OFFSET Default is 50
match lighting curves with other
equipment in the panel.
Manually sets the default backlight
Range is -10 to 99 [2]
DEFAULT BACKLIGHT OFFSET offset. Setting can vary for user
Default is 0
preference.
Manually sets the default contrast
Range is -50 to 50 [2]
DEFAULT CONTRAST OFFSET offset. Setting can vary for user
Default is 0
preference.
[1] Lighting level is selected by ambient lighting.
[2] Lighting level is selected by lighting bus input.
[3] Blackout flight deck (e.g., blanket) to simulate night conditions to determine preferred lighting level.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 6-14
6.1.5 Sensors
OAT Sensor Installed
Select YES if an OAT sensor is installed.

Figure 6-13 Sensor Page

Altitude Source 1 and 2

NOTE
Altitude sources do not need to be set. The GTX uses both altitude sources if set. If no
altitude sources are selected, the GTX will use any altitude source in priority order. Refer
to section 3.6.2.

Set the GTX 3X5 primary and secondary altitude sources per the following table.

Table 6-13 Panel Mount Altitude Source Settings


Item Configuration Notes
Not valid for ALTITUDE SOURCE
NONE
1. An Altitude source is required.
Select if Altitude input is from
RS232 1
RS232 port 1.
Select if Altitude input is from
RS232 2
RS232 port 2.
Select if Altitude input is from
RS232 3
ALTITUDE SOURCE 1 RS232 port 3.
and Select if Altitude input is from
A429 1
ALTITUDE SOURCE 2 [1] ARINC 429 port 1.
Select if Altitude input is from
A429 2
ARINC 429 port 2.
Select if using GTN or GDU 620
HSDB
HSDB (GTX 345 only).
Select if Gillham Gray Code is
GILLHAM
used.
ALT ENC Select if GAE is used.
[1] Sets the secondary altitude source.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 6-15
GPS 1 and 2
Set the GTX 3X5 primary and secondary GPS settings per the following table.

Table 6-14 Panel Mount GPS Source


Item Configuration Notes
NONE A GPS source is required.
Select if GTX 3X5 with GPS is
INTRNL
used.
Select if GPS input is from RS232
RS232 1
port 1.
Select if GPS input is from RS232
RS232 2
port 2.
Select if GPS input is from RS232
RS232 3
port 3.
GPS 1 SRC Select if GPS input is from RS232
RS232 4 [3]
and port 4.
GPS 2 SRC [1] Not approved for use under this
A429 1
STC.
Not approved for use under this
A429 2
STC.
GTN 1 [2] [3] Select if using GTN 1 HSDB.
GTN 2 [2] [3] Select if using GTN 2 HSDB.
Not approved for use under this
GIA 1 [3]
STC.
Not approved for use under this
GIA 2 [3]
STC.
DO NOT USE - Not approved for
use under this STC. This setting
UNK
does not meet ADS-B Out
Compliant requirements.
DO NOT USE - Not approved for
use under this STC. This setting
1E-3
does not meet ADS-B Out
Compliant requirements.
INTGRTY [4] DO NOT USE - Not approved for
use under this STC. This setting
1E-5
does not meet ADS-B Out
Compliant requirements.
Select if using the GTX 3X5
1E-7 Internal GPS Source setting, for
ADS-B Out Compliance.
Select if using an external Garmin
AUTO
GPS Unit (GTN or GNS).
Installer must measure to
Range is: determine an accurate GPS
LAT OFST [4] -6mt to 6 mt Antenna Offset from the Datum.
(Increments of 2mt) UNK is not an approved option
under this STC.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 6-16
Item Configuration Notes
Installer must measure to
Range is: determine an accurate GPS
LON OFST [4] 2mt to 60mt Antenna Offset from the Datum.
(Increments of 2mt) UNK is not an approved option
under this STC.
[1] Sets the secondary GPS source.
[2] Make sure the GTN selection (#1 or #2) matches the correct GTN GPS source in the GTN (#1 for
primary GTN or #2 for secondary GTN).
[3] Applicable to the GTX 345 Only.
[4] There are separate configuration settings for GPS 1 and GPS 2.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 6-17
Internal Alt Encoder

NOTE
A minimum of three test points is required for calibration.

Figure 6-14 Internal Alt Encoder Page


Set the GTX 3X5 altitude alert settings to the following table.

Table 6-15 Panel Mount Alt Encoder Settings


Item Configuration Notes
YES Select YES if a GAE is installed,
INSTALLED
NO otherwise select NO.

Select aircraft Maximum


Range is:
CEILING Operating Altitude.
8000 ft to 30,000 ft
GAE is only rated to 30,000 ft.
A minimum of 3 test points are
Range is: required. These values are used
TEST POINTS
3 to 20 [1] to calibrate the GAE. Calibration is
required prior to flight. [2]
[1] The maximum number of test points is limited by the aircraft ceiling setting.
[2] If there is an inaccuracy during the altitude checks, recalibration with additional test points is
required.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 6-18
Internal Alt Encoder Adjustment

Figure 6-15 Internal Alt Encoder Adjustment Page


Set the GAE module altitude to match the primary altitude display.
1. Connect a Pitot/static test set to the aircraft.
2. Use the Pitot/static test set and if applicable the aircraft altimeter for altitude verification.
3. With the initial test point selected, run the Pitot/static system to the selected TEST ALT value.
4. Once the Pitot/static test set stabilizes at the TEST ALT value, push the ENT key on the panel to
select the CORRECTION value.
5. Change the CORRECTION value using the 8 or 9 key until the MEASURED value indicates the
TEST ALT value.
6. Once the CORRECTION value is set, push the ENT key to go back to the TEST ALT selection.
7. Select the next TEST ALT test point and change the Pitot/static test set to match the TEST ALT
value.
8. Run to that altitude.
9. Continue to calibrate the GAE using steps 2 through 6 until all test points identified.
10. Once all test points are successfully completed push the CRSR key to exit.
If using the GTX 3X5 Install Tool
1. With a Pitot/static test set connected, select the GAE tab under the Sensor tab in the Configuration
section.
2. Under the Installed option, select the GAE-12.
3. Select the appropriate ceiling based on the aircraft’s maximum operating altitude.
4. Select a minimum of 3 Point Counts.
5. Select the Set key.
6. Adjust the Pitot/static test set to match the first altitude test point.
7. Select the Start key under the automatic adjustment.
8. Once the correction value is stable and the measured altitude box turns green, select “Continue.”
9. Adjust the Pitot/static test set to match the next altitude test point.
10. Once the Pitot/static test set matches the test point, select “Continue.”
11. Once the correction value is stable and the measured value turns green, select “Continue.”
12. Continue to calibrate the GAE using steps 9 through 11 until the calibration is complete.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 6-19
6.1.6 Airframe

NOTE
When a portable ADS-B In receiver system (e.g., GDL 39) is in use, both 1090ES and UAT
IN CAPABLE settings can be set to YES.

NOTE
Unknown must not be selected for any configuration in accordance with the STC.

Set the GTX 3X5 ADSB settings per the following table.
Table 6-16 Panel Mount ADS-B Settings
Item Configuration Notes
UNKNOWN
LIGHT
SMALL
HIGH
PERFORMANCE Select ROTORCRAFT. All other selections are not
ACRFT CATGY approved under this STC.
ROTORCRAFT
GLIDER
LIGHTER-THAN-AIR
ULTRALIGHT
UAV
UNKNOWN
<=75 kt
<=150 kt Select the appropriate rotorcraft maximum airspeed
ACFT MAX A/S <=300 kt in accordance with the rotorcraft type data.
<=600 kt
<=1200 kt
>1200 kt
UNKNOWN
<=15 meters
<=25 meters Select the appropriate rotorcraft length in
<=35 meters accordance with the rotorcraft type data. For
<=45 meters ROTORCRAFT category, the AIRCRAFT LENGTH
AIRCRAFT LENGTH
<=55 meters is measured from the rotor tip at the forward most
<=65 meters position to the tail.
<=75 meters
<=85 meters
>85 meters

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 6-20
Item Configuration Notes
UNKNOWN
<=23.0 meters
<=28.5 meters
<=33.0 meters
<=34.0 meters
<=38.0 meters
Select the appropriate rotorcraft width in accordance
<=39.5 meters
AIRCRAFT WIDTH with the rotorcraft type data. AIRCRAFT WIDTH is
<=45.0 meters
the diameter of the rotor arc.
<=52.0 meters
<=59.0 meters
<=67.0 meters
<=72.5 meters
<=80.0 meters
>80.0 meters
DISABLED
Sets 1090ES ADS-B transmission function. Select
1090ES OUT CONTROL ENABLED
ENABLED or PILOT SET.
PILOT SET
UAT OUT RMT CONTROL N/A This function is not approved under this STC.
NO Determines if the aircraft can receive 1090ES
1090ES IN CAPABLE
YES ADS_B messages. Select YES for GTX 345 units.

NO Determines if the aircraft can receive UAT ADS-B


UAT IN CAPABLE
YES messages. Select YES for GTX 345 units.

DISABLED GTX 345 units only.


ADS-B IN PROCESSING
ENABLED Select ENABLED.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 6-21
6.1.7 Aircraft
Set the GTX 3X5 AIRCRAFT settings per the following table.

Table 6-17 Panel Mount Aircraft Settings


Item Configuration Notes
On Panel mount units, use display
AIRCRAFT TAIL NUMBER Enter Aircraft Tail Number keys 0-9 to enter the alphanumeric
aircraft tail number.
Sets the ICAO address in octal or
HEX
hex format.
ADDRESS [1]
Verify value with aircraft
OCTAL
registration records.
Setting can vary for user
NO
preference.
ALLOW PILOT TO EDIT FLT ID
Select YES to allow pilot to
YES
change FLT ID.
Sets the default flight ID used in
TAIL normal mode.
DEFAULT FLT ID Select TAIL unless an operational
ENTRY need to change the value is
required.
Sets the flight ID prefix with the
NONE carrier abbreviation (e.g., Garmin
AT is GAT).
FLIGHT ID PREFIX
Select NONE unless an
ENTRY operational need to change the
value is required.
[1] If the tail number is recognized as a US registered tail number, the ICAO address is
automatically filled by the GTX. It only needs to be verified against the aircraft registration
records.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 6-22
6.1.8 Diagnostics

Figure 6-16 Diagnostics Page

The Diagnostics page shows information for troubleshooting purposes.


• Discrete input state
• Lighting bus voltages
• Photocell voltages
• Outside air temperature
• Display temperature
• RS-232 channels
• ARINC 429 channels
• Gillham input state
• GPS Source 1 and GPS Source 2 status
• HSDB status (GTX 345)

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 6-23
6.2 Remote GTX 3X5

NOTE
Screen shots in this section are example configurations only.

The GTX 3X5 Install Tool requires Windows 2000, XP, Vista, or Windows 7. There is no support for
Apple products at this time. To ensure that the GTX 3X5 Install Tool displays correctly on the computer,
the computer screen must be configured to display text and other items on the screen at 100%. For
example, for Windows 7 in the Control Panel - Display, set to “Smaller - 100%.” Use a PC and the GTX
3X5 Install Tool to configure units without a display. Panel mount units can also be configured through the
Install Tool. Selections for remote mount units are identical to those for panel mount units. Refer to
section 6.1. The GTX 3X5 Install Tool (P/N 006-A0271-01) is available at Garmin’s Dealer Resource
Center. A USB-A plug to USB-B plug cable (not provided) is necessary.

USB-A USB-B

Figure 6-17 USB-A and USB-B Connectors


To use the GTX 3X5 Install Tool:
1. De-energize the unit.
2. Connect the USB-A to USB-B cable between the computer and the USB-B receptacle installed in
the aircraft wire harness.
3. Energize the unit.
4. Launch the GTX 3X5 Install Tool.
5. Select the Configuration tab.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 6-24
6.2.1 Audio Configuration Page
1. Select the settings for the configuration parameters included under Audio Options: Output,
Volume, and Voice. Test Audio is only used to assist with volume adjustments.
2. Select the desired settings for the configuration parameters included under Audio Alerts: Timer
Expired, Traffic, Altitude Monitor, and Altitude Deviation (if the altitude monitor is enabled). The
Altitude Monitor, Altitude Deviation and Timer Expired configuration parameters are applicable
to panel mount units only. The Altitude Deviation configuration parameter is on the Unit Settings
page on the GTX unit itself (panel mount units).
Refer to section 6.1.1 for additional guidance on these configuration items approved under this STC.

Figure 6-18 Audio Configuration Page

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 6-25
6.2.2 Interface Configuration Pages
Select the settings for the RS-232, RS-422 (GTX 345 only), ARINC 429, HSDB (GTX 345 only), and
Discrete interface configuration parameters. Refer to section 6.1.2 for additional guidance on these
configuration items approved under this STC.

Figure 6-19 Interface Configuration Page (Serial)

Figure 6-20 Interface Configuration Page (A429)

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 6-26
Figure 6-21 Interface Configuration Page (Discretes)

Figure 6-22 Interface Configuration Page (HSDB)

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 6-27
6.2.3 Unit Configuration Page
Select the settings for the following configuration parameters in the Identification section: VFR Squawk
Code and Installation ID. Select the settings for the following configuration parameters in the Unit Options
section: FIS-B and Bluetooth are only valid for the GTX 345 units. Select the settings for the following
configuration parameters in the Display Options section (applicable to panel mount units only): Altitude
Units, Temperature Units, and Restore Pages on. Refer to section 6.1.3 for additional guidance on these
configuration items approved under this STC.

Figure 6-23 Unit Configuration Page

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 6-28
6.2.4 Display Configuration Page
This section applies to panel mount units only. Refer to section 6.1.4 for additional guidance on these
configuration items approved under this STC.
1. Select the settings for the following configuration parameters in the Display Backlight section:
Source and Minimum Brightness.
2. Select the settings for the following configuration parameters in the Key Backlight section: Source
and Minimum Brightness.
3. Select the settings for the following configuration parameters in the Photocell Curve section:
Slope, Offset, and Transition.
4. Select the settings for the following configuration parameters in the Lighting Bus Curve section:
Slope, Offset, and Bus Type.
5. Select the settings for the following configuration parameters in the Defaults section: Brightness
Offset and Contrast Offset.

Figure 6-24 Display Configuration Page

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 6-29
6.2.5 Sensor Configuration
Garmin Altitude Encoder
Refer to section 6.1.5 for Garmin Altitude Encoder calibration.

Figure 6-25 Sensor Configuration Page (Garmin Altitude Encoder)


GPS
Select the settings for the following configuration parameters for both GPS 1 and GPS 2 if applicable:
 Source
 Source Integrity Level
 Lateral Antenna Offset
 Longitudinal Antenna Offset
 System Design Assurance
The System Design Assurance configuration parameter is not available when configuring a panel mount
GTX 3X5 unit through the unit's display (automatically set to Level C (<=10^-5)). For units configured
from the GTX 3X5 Install Tool, the System Design Assurance must be set to Level C (<=10^-5). Refer to
section 6.1.5 for additional guidance on these configuration items approved under this STC.

Figure 6-26 Sensor Configuration Page (GPS)

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 6-30
Additional Sensors
1. Select the settings for the following configuration parameters in the Altitude Sources section:
Primary and Secondary.
2. Select the settings for the following configuration parameters in the OAT Probe section: Installed.
Refer to section 6.1.5 for additional guidance on these configuration items approved under this STC.

Figure 6-27 Sensor Configuration Page (Additional Sensors)

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 6-31
6.2.6 Airframe Configuration Page
1. Select the settings for the following configuration parameters in the Airframe Configuration
section: Max Airspeed, Length, Width, and Category.
2. Select the settings for the following configuration parameters in the Operational Options section:
1090 ES In Capable, UAT In Capable, 1090 ES Out Control, UAT Out Remote, and ADS-B In
Processing.
Refer to section 6.1.6 for additional guidance on these configuration items approved under this STC.

Figure 6-28 Airframe Configuration Page

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 6-32
6.2.7 Aircraft Configuration Page
1. Select the settings for the following configuration parameters in the Aircraft Configuration
section: Aircraft Registration, ICAO Address Format, and ICAO Address.
2. Select the settings for the following configuration parameters in the Flight ID section: Allow Pilot
Entry, Default Selection, Default (if applicable), Prefix Selection, and Prefix (if applicable).
Refer to section 6.1.7 for additional guidance on these configuration items approved under this STC.

Figure 6-29 Aircraft Configuration Page

6.3 GTX 3X5 with GTN 6XX/7XX


This section gives details for configuring the GTN 6XX/7XX to provide Transponder Remote Control and/
or ADS-B In Display functions when interfaced to a GTX Transponder.
To configure the GTN 6XX/7XX:
1. Push and hold the HOME key of the GTN 6XX/7XX unit.
2. Energize the GTN 6XX/7XX unit.
3. Release the HOME key when the display shows.
4. Select the GTN Setup page.
5. Configure the GTN as described in the following sections to provide Transponder Remote Control
and/or ADS-B In Display.
6.3.1 Transponder Remote Control
Transponder Remote Control is supplied by an RS-232 interface. For dual GTN installations, a GTN can
control a GTX transponder interfaced to the other GTN through HSDB crossfill.
For the GTN that is interfaced directly to the GTX transponder:
1. Select the RS-232 page.
2. Configure the RS-232 Port that is interfaced to the GTX transponder as specified in the table
below.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 6-33
Table 6-18 RS-232 Input/Output Configuration
Selection Description Notes
Provides remote transponder This configuration also provides
GTX Mode S+ control of an interfaced GTX GPS position source and heading
transponder. to the GTX transponder.
Provides remote transponder
This configuration also provides
control of an interfaced GTX
GTX w/TIS+ GPS position source and heading
transponder and receives TIS-A
to the GTX transponder.
Traffic data.
In dual GTN installations, for the GTN that is not interfaced directly to the GTX transponder:
1. Select the Interfaced Equipment Page.
2. Configure the GTX transponder as Present.
3. Choose the GTX Mode S+ selection for Transponder Type.
6.3.2 ADS-B In Display (GTX 345 Only)
The GTN 6XX/7XX can be configured to display ADS-B In Traffic and Weather data that is provided by
the GTX 345. This data is provided by an HSDB interface. Ensure the GTN Source ID on the GTN Main
System Configuration page matches the GTN selection on the HSDB page of the GTX (e.g., GTN #1 to
GTN 1).
1. Select the Interfaced Equipment Page.
2. Configure the ADS-B In Source to Present.
3. Choose the GTX #1/2 selection for ADS-B In Source Type.
4. Choose the TAS/TCAS selection for External Traffic Source if the GTX 345 is interfaced to an
active traffic system.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 6-34
6.4 GTX 3X5 With GNS 400W/500W

NOTE
Refer to the aircraft specific wiring diagrams for the correct port connections used.
For GTX 335/335R installations, refer to table C-3 for GNS configuration.
For GTX 345/345R installations, this section gives instructions to configure GNS 400W/500W Series
navigators to show ADS-B In Traffic and Weather data. The RS-232 and ARINC 429 configurations are
necessary for this interface.
1. Push and hold the ENT key of the GNS 400W/500W Series unit.
2. Energize the GNS 400W/500W Series unit.
3. Release the ENT key when the display activates.
While in configuration mode, rotate small right knob to select pages.
Change data on the configuration page:
1. Push the small right knob to select the cursor.
2. Rotate the large right knob to move between data fields.
3. Rotate the small right knob to change a highlighted field.
4. Push the ENT key to accept the entry.
Configure the selectable RS-232 and ARINC 429 inputs and/or outputs as specified in the tables below.

Figure 6-30 Main RS-232 Config Page


Table 6-19 RS-232 Input/Output Configuration
Selection Description Configuration/Notes
This configuration will supply
ADSB TFC ADS-B in Traffic Only. GPS position source to the GTX
transponder.
This configuration will supply
ADS-B In Traffic and FIS-B
ADSB TFC WX GPS position source to the GTX
Weather.
transponder.

Table 6-20 ARINC 429 Output Configuration


Selection Description Configuration/Notes
ADSB TFC ADS-B Traffic without TAS/TCAS.
ADSB TFC w/TCAS ADS-B Traffic correlated with TAS/TCAS Traffic.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 6-35
7 OPERATION AND PERFORMANCE CHECKOUT
7.1 Interfaces (Configuration Mode) ......................................................................................................7-2
7.1.1 Airborne/Ground Test Mode ......................................................................................................7-2
7.1.2 Audio Panel ................................................................................................................................7-2
7.1.3 Radio Altimeter ..........................................................................................................................7-3
7.1.4 Discrete Switches .......................................................................................................................7-3
7.2 Interfaces (Normal Mode) ................................................................................................................7-4
7.2.1 Air Data ......................................................................................................................................7-4
7.2.2 AHRS/IRU .................................................................................................................................7-5
7.2.3 GPS (External GPS Receiver)....................................................................................................7-5
7.2.4 Control Display (GTX 3X5R)....................................................................................................7-6
7.2.5 PEDs (GTX 345) ........................................................................................................................7-6
7.2.6 External Traffic System (GTX 345)...........................................................................................7-7
7.2.7 Temperature Probe (GTX 3X5) .................................................................................................7-7
7.2.8 TIS-A (GTX 335).......................................................................................................................7-7
7.2.9 TIS-B / FIS-B (GTX 345) ..........................................................................................................7-8
7.3 Performance ......................................................................................................................................7-9
7.3.1 GPS Reception (Internal GPS Receiver)....................................................................................7-9
7.3.2 Regulatory Tests.......................................................................................................................7-10
7.3.3 ADS-B Out Test .......................................................................................................................7-10
7.3.4 EMC Check ..............................................................................................................................7-11
7.4 GPS Antenna Performance .............................................................................................................7-13
7.5 Documentation................................................................................................................................7-15
7.5.1 Rotorcraft Flight Manual Supplement......................................................................................7-15
7.5.2 Instructions for Continued Airworthiness ................................................................................7-15

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 7-1
NOTE
Certain test procedures require the use of a Mode S transponder ramp tester such as an
Aeroflex IFR-6000 or TIC TR-220. They must be operated in accordance with unit
operator's manual.

NOTE
Dual GTX installations require performance of each unit to be checked through
procedures detailed in this section.

7.1 Interfaces (Configuration Mode)


7.1.1 Airborne/Ground Test Mode
Certain test procedures require the transponder to be placed in an airborne state to reply to any Mode A or
Mode C interrogations. The GTX uses advanced Air/Ground logic to determine the state of the
transponder. This logic must be temporarily bypassed in order to place the transponder in an airborne state.

NOTE
The transponder must only be placed into Airborne Test mode for testing. Once testing is
complete, either return the squat (collective) switch to original settings or remove the GTX
from Ground Test mode.

To place panel mounted GTX 3X5 transponder into an airborne state:


1. Start the GTX in Ground Test mode (hold the CRSR key and press the ON key).
2. A “GROUND TEST MODE” alert message will be displayed on the GTX 3X5 message screen.
To place remotely mounted GTX 3X5R transponder interfaced to GTN into an airborne state:
1. Start the GTN in configuration mode (hold the HOME key while cycling power).
2. Navigate to the XPDR 1 Installation Settings page.
3. Touch the Force Airborne Test key.
4. Restart the GTN in normal mode.
7.1.2 Audio Panel

NOTE
If the checkout procedure is performed during unit configuration, steps 1 and 2 of each of
the following procedures should be skipped.

The audio alert volume checkout can be performed during unit configuration as described in section 6.1.1
and the following steps:
1. Start the GTX 3X5 in configuration mode (hold the OFF key to power down the unit, then hold
the ENT key and push the ON key).
2. Navigate to the AUD page (push the FUNC key to cycle through pages).
3. Choose each selection of the TEST AUDIO item to play and set the volume level for the aural
messages/tones to be heard under all anticipated cockpit noise conditions.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 7-2
The audio alert volume on remotely mounted GTX 3X5R transponders is set through PC Install Tool
following these steps:
1. Start the GTX 3X5R in configuration mode. (With the GTX 3X5R powered off, connect a
computer to the GTX 3X5R via USB. Apply power to the GTX 3X5R, then run the Install Tool.)
2. Navigate to the Audio Configuration page.
3. Choose each selection of the TEST AUDIO item.
4. Select the TEST key to play the selected test audio and set the volume level for the aural
messages/tones to be heard under all anticipated cockpit noise conditions.
7.1.3 Radio Altimeter
Radar altitude indication on panel mounted GTX 3X5 transponders is verified following these steps:
1. Start the GTX 3X5 in configuration mode (hold the OFF key to power down the unit, then hold
the ENT key and push the ON key).
2. Navigate to the DIAG page (push the FUNC key to cycle through pages).
3. Select the A429 channel that is configured for RADIO ALTITUDE (the correct channel must be
labeled 164) and verify the altitude indicated is correct.
Radar altitude indication on remotely mounted GTX 3X5 transponders is verified following these steps:
1. Start the GTX 3X5R in configuration mode. (With the GTX 3X5R powered off, connect a
computer to the GTX 3X5R via USB. Apply power to the GTX 3X5R, then run the Install Tool.)
2. Navigate to the Connection Status page under the Diagnostics tab on the GTX 3X5 Install Tool.
3. Check the A429 channel that is configured for RADAR ALTIMETER and verify the altitude
indicated is correct.
7.1.4 Discrete Switches
Operation of each remote switch (optional) interfaced to panel mounted GTX 3X5 transponders is checked
following these steps:
1. Start the GTX 3X5 in configuration mode (hold the OFF key to power down the unit, then hold
the ENT key and push the ON key).
2. Navigate to the DIAG page (push the FUNC key to cycle through pages).
3. Set the discrete inputs that are interfaced and configured for the GTX.
4. Observe the state of discrete input while activating the switch and verify indication when switch is
activated (for the collective switch this may require the switch to be manually pulled LOW or
HIGH, depending on configuration).
Operation of each remote switch (optional) interfaced to remotely mounted GTX 3X5R transponders is
checked following these steps:
1. Start the GTX 3X5R in configuration mode. (With the GTX 3X5R powered off, connect a
computer to the GTX 3X5R via USB. Apply power to the GTX 3X5R, then run the Install Tool.)
2. Navigate to the Discretes page under the Diagnostics tab on the GTX 3X5 Install Tool.
3. Observe the state of discrete input while activating the switch and verify indication when switch is
activated (for the collective switch this may require the switch to be manually pulled LOW or
HIGH, depending on configuration).

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 7-3
7.2 Interfaces (Normal Mode)
7.2.1 Air Data
The GTX can receive altitude data from an external source or from the optional GAE.

NOTE
After applying power to an altitude source, it may take several minutes to warm up.
During the warm-up period, the altitude display on the GTX will be dashed out.

1. Configure the GAE to OFF if installed.


2. Power up the GTX in normal mode.
3. Remove power from all but one source, if multiple sources provide air data to the GTX.
4. Verify transponder field on the control display shows a red X when power is removed from the
active source for remotely mounted GTX 3X5R, or the correct data from active source is displayed
on the panel mounted GTX 3X5 transponders.
5. If multiple sources are used, remove power from the active source and apply power to another
source that has not been checked.
6. Repeat step 4 until all available sources have been checked. Examine the electrical connections
and configuration setup for the interfaced air data source if the steps do not perform correctly.
7. Configure the GAE ON, if installed and remove power from all external air data sources.
8. Repeat step 4 to check the GAE.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 7-4
7.2.2 AHRS/IRU
Verification that the GTX receives heading data from an external source is accomplished with the
following procedure:
1. Turn GTX power on and verify the unit is transmitting (not in SBY mode) and is not in an “AIR”
state.
2. Using a test set capable of displaying ADS-B Out data, verify heading reported from the active
transponder matches the heading of the source.
3. Remove power from the heading source and verify that the magnetic heading field is dashed out on
the test set.
4. Repeat step 2 and step 3 for all transponders interfaced with heading source. Examine the
electrical connections and configuration setup for the interfaced AHRS/IRU if the steps do not
perform correctly.
7.2.3 GPS (External GPS Receiver)

NOTE
In order for the Transponder to relay the additional accuracy and integrity required by
AC 20-165A Version 2 compliant equipment, the GPS unit's RS-232 serial output must be
configured to the extended ADS-B format. This is indicated via selections with a “+” in
the selections title (i.e., “ADS-B OUT+,” “GTX Mode S+,” “Panel GTX w TIS+”).

Verification that the GTX receives position source data from an external source is accomplished with the
following procedure:
1. Power up the GTX and the position source.
2. Remove power from all but one source, if multiple sources provide position data to the GTX, and
verify a valid signal has been acquired.
3. Verify “ADS-B FAIL” system message or annunciation is not active on the control display
interfaced to remotely mounted GTX 3X5R transponders, or “NO ADSB” annunciation is
removed from the display of panel mounted GTX 3X5 transponder.
4. Remove power from the currently active source and apply power to another source that has not
been checked, if multiple sources are used.
5. Repeat steps 2, 3, and 4 until all available sources have been checked. Examine the electrical
connections and configuration setup for the interfaced position source if the steps do not perform
correctly.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 7-5
7.2.4 Control Display (GTX 3X5R)
Control display interfaced to remote mounted GTX 3X5R transponder is verified with the following
checkout procedure:
1. Power on the GTX 3X5R transponder (in normal mode) and interfaced control display.
2. Verify there is no red X in the transponder data field on the display.
3. Verify transponder code can be entered (and changed) into the code field on the control display and
is correctly displayed.
4. Select transponder 2 and repeat steps 2 through 4 if dual transponders are installed.
5. Remove power from each transponder and verify there is red X in transponder data field on
interfaced control display.
7.2.5 PEDs (GTX 345)
PEDs can be interfaced to the GTX 345 via bluetooth. PED compatible with the Garmin Pilot Application
is required to perform the interface check. List of compatible devices can be found on Garmin's website.
To setup bluetooth connection:
1. Place the GTX 345 into Bluetooth pairing mode by navigating to the Bluetooth page under the
System menu.
2. Enable Bluetooth connectivity on the PED. Once enabled, the GTX 345 will be viewable in the list
of available devices.
3. Select the GTX 345 from the list of available Bluetooth devices on the PED.
After pairing a compatible PED with the GTX 345, perform the following checkout using the Garmin Pilot
Application:
1. On the Garmin Pilot application, go to the Connext page.
2. Select the “GTX 345” from the list of devices and make sure the status is “Connected.”
3. Crosscheck traffic and/or weather data shown on the Garmin Pilot application against the data
presented on the interfaced display if the GTX 345 is interfaced to a display capable of presenting
traffic and/or weather data.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 7-6
7.2.6 External Traffic System (GTX 345)
A GTX 345 interfaced to a Garmin GTS 8XX or an L-3 Communications SKY497/SKY899 SkyWatch®
traffic system is checked with the following procedure:
1. Select Traffic page on the control display interfaced to GTX 345 that is configured for traffic
system control and verify TAS or TCAS system status does not indicate failed.
2. Verify TAS or TCAS system operating mode can be changed by selecting operate or standby on
the display and TAS or TCAS system status indicates the selected mode.
3. Set the TAS or TCAS operating mode to standby.
4. Select the traffic system test function on the display. Verify the TAS or TCAS system status
indicates test mode, the traffic system executes its self-test, and a self-test pattern is displayed on
the traffic display.
GTX 345 interfaced to an Avidyne (Ryan) TAS 6XX (9900BX) traffic system is checked with the
following procedure:
1. Go to the Traffic page on the interfaced display configured for TCAD control and verify the
TCAD system status does not indicate failed.
2. Verify the TCAD ground mode can be selected by changing the on or off selection in the TCAD
control menu and TCAD system status indicates standby or operate, or ground when ground mode
is selected.
Examine the electrical connections and configurations of the interfaced TAS/TCAS system and GTX 345
and if any of the steps do not perform correctly.
7.2.7 Temperature Probe (GTX 3X5)
OAT is checked with the following procedure:
1. Press the FUNC key to cycle through pages until OAT is displayed.
2. Remove power from all Air Data sources interfaced to the GTX.
3. Verify the OAT is provided and is correct.
Static Air Temperature (SAT) is checked with the following procedure:
1. Navigate to the ALT page (press the FUNC key to cycle through pages).
2. Use the 8/9 keys to scroll until SAT is displayed.
3. Remove power from all Air Data sources interfaced to the GTX.
4. Verify the SAT is provided and is correct.
7.2.8 TIS-A (GTX 335)
Traffic interface of GTX 335 interfaced to TIS-A display is checked with the following procedure:
1. Select the Traffic Map on the display.
2. Verify that TIS FAIL and NO DATA (yellow) messages are not displayed.
3. On the Traffic Map page, verify the status of the traffic system is either TIS Standby or TIS
Operating/Unavailable (i.e., TAS must not be displayed).

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 7-7
7.2.9 TIS-B / FIS-B (GTX 345)
TIS-B/FIS-B interface of GTX 345 transponder interfaced to GTN is checked with the following
procedure:
1. Select the LRU status page on the GTN display.
2. Navigate to the GTX Status page (System > External LRUs).
3. Verify the GTX Status is marked with a green check.
4. Perform a ground check if the aircraft is located within range of an FAA ground station and targets
of opportunity are available, otherwise perform check in flight within range of an FAA ground
station.
Status of interfaced LRU is not available on the GNS. ADS-B ramp tester such as an Aeroflex IFR-6000 or
TIC TR-220 must be used to provide simulated TIS-B and FIS-B data to the GTX if the aircraft is not
located within range of an FAA ground station.
TIS-B/FIS-B interface of GTX 345 interfaced to a GNS is checked with the following procedure:
1. Select traffic page on the interfaced display and verify there are no ADS-B FAIL or TRAFFIC
FAIL annunciations.
2. Observe targets of opportunity from ADS-B equipped aircraft, or an FAA ground station.
3. Select the weather page on interfaced display and set to display multiple weather products. (It may
take up to 10 minutes after power up for the system to begin receiving FIS-B weather products).
4. Verify a valid time stamp is displayed by at least one selected weather product.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 7-8
7.3 Performance
7.3.1 GPS Reception (Internal GPS Receiver)

NOTE
GPS reception checks are not necessary if an external GPS source is in use.

GTX 335 and GTX 345 units with the internal GPS receiver have GPS reception checked with the
following procedure:
1. Verify the LAT/LON on the ADS-B Out page matches a known reference.
2. Select 121.150 MHz on the COM transceiver and transmit for a period of 35 seconds.
3. Verify the GPS position remains valid.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the following frequencies:

• 121.170 MHz • 121.200 MHz • 121.200 MHz • 121.220 MHz

• 121.250 MHz • 131.200 MHz • 131.220 MHz • 131.270 MHz

• 131.300 MHz • 131.320 MHz • 131.350 MHz

5. For VHF radios with 8.33 KHz channel spacing, in addition to frequencies in step 4, include the
following frequencies:

• 121.185 MHz • 121.190 MHz • 130.285 MHz • 131.290 MHz

6. Repeat steps 2 through 6 for all remaining COM transceivers in the aircraft.
7. For TCAS equipped rotorcraft, turn the TCAS system on and verify the GPS position remains
valid.
8. For SATCOM equipped rotorcraft, to verify the GPS position remains valid with SATCOM system
in use.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 7-9
7.3.2 Regulatory Tests
Altitude Reporting Equipment Tests in accordance with 14 CFR Part 91.411 and Part 43 Appendix E, and
ATC Transponder Tests and Inspections in accordance with 14 CFR Part 91.413 and Part 43 Appendix F
are required for each altitude source interfaced to transponder, including the GAE.
7.3.3 ADS-B Out Test
The ADS-B Out test is performed using Mode S transponder ramp tester. Rotorcraft location must allow
for good GPS signal reception (e.g., outdoors with a clear view of the sky).
1. Power on the aircraft/avionics and verify the GPS source(s) have acquired a position.
2. Verify the GTX transponder is in ADS-B TX mode.
3. Using transponder tester, verify the following ADS-B Out parameters are transmitted:
• Aircraft emitter category is Rotorcraft (indicated as “A7” On the TIC TR-220)
• Aircraft Length and Width (as documented in the aircraft checkout log)
• 1090 ADS-B In Capability matching the configuration setting documented in the aircraft
checkout log
• UAT (978) ADS-B In Capability matching the configuration setting documented in the aircraft
checkout log
4. Place the GTX transponder into airborne state (refer to section 7.1.1).
5. If GTX is connected to dual GPS sources, disable the GPS source that is not checked by covering
the GPS antenna or removing power. Verify that disabled GPS source no longer receives satellite
data.
6. Verify the GPS source that is checked has acquired position.
7. Select ALT mode on the GTX and using transponder tester, verify the transmitted ADS-B Out
parameters are:
• NACv > 1
• SDA > 2
• SIL > 3
• NACp > 8
• NIC > 7
8. Repeat steps 4 through 7 for other GPS source, if GTX is connected to dual GPS sources.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 7-10
7.3.4 EMC Check
After installation each GTX must be checked for EMC to verify there is no interference with other installed
avionics systems and that other avionics systems are not interfering with the GTX. An example of a
tabulated EMC Source/Victim matrix is shown in figure 7-1. Perform the EMC check using the form.
1. List existing equipment in the Source rows and repeat in Victim columns.
2. Apply power to all avionics systems except the GTX and verify all systems function properly.
3. Apply power to the GTX. For remote mounted GTX 3X5R, connect a computer to the GTX 3X5R
via USB, and then apply power and run the Install Tool.
4. Pair a compatible PED device to the GTX 345 if internal Bluetooth feature in the unit is enabled.
5. Remove power from all other avionics systems, except from the control display interfaced to GTX
3X5, if applicable.
6. One at the time, operate the systems listed on the form and verify each system functions properly.
7. Verify no active faults are displayed on panel mounted GTX 3X5, or no active faults are displayed
on Install Tool Status page for remote mount GTX 3X5R transponders.
8. For VHF COM radios, monitor one local frequency, one remote (far field) frequency, and one
unused frequency, and verify no unintended squelch breaks or audio tones interfere with
communications.
9. For VHF NAV radios, monitor one local frequency, one remote (far field) frequency, and one
unused frequency, and verify there are no guidance errors and no audio tones interfere with the
station ID.
10. Repeat steps 6 through 9 until every system listed on the form has been checked.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 7-11
‫‪9,&7,0‬‬

‫ ‪&RPPXQLFDWLRQ5DGLR V‬‬
‫‪3RZHU3ODQW,QVWUXPHQWV‬‬
‫‪7XUQDQG%DQN ,QGLFDWRU‬‬
‫‪9HUWLFDO6SHHG,QGLFDWRU‬‬

‫‪*0$RU*0$F‬‬
‫‪*RY530,QFU'HFU‬‬
‫ ‪1DYLJDWLRQ5DGLR V‬‬
‫‪0DJQHWLF&RPSDVV‬‬
‫‪$LUVSHHG,QGLFDWRU‬‬

‫‪+HDGLQJ,QGLFDWRU‬‬
‫‪$WWLWXGH,QGLFDWRU‬‬

‫‪7UDIILF6HQVRU‬‬
‫‪7UDIILF6HQVRU‬‬
‫‪5DGDU$OWLPHWHU‬‬
‫‪$XWRSLORW6$6‬‬

‫‪(QJLQH5HOLJKW‬‬
‫‪2$7,QGLFDWRU‬‬

‫‪$XGLR3DQHO‬‬
‫‪(QJ'HLFLQJ‬‬
‫‪+\G6\VWHP‬‬
‫‪3XOVH/LJKW‬‬

‫‪7$67&$6‬‬
‫‪$QWL&ROO/W‬‬
‫‪)XHO9DOYH‬‬

‫‪*HQHUDWRU‬‬
‫‪3LWRW+HDW‬‬

‫;;;‪*7‬‬
‫‪$OWLPHWHU‬‬

‫‪/GJ/WV‬‬
‫‪3RV/W‬‬
‫‪&ORFN‬‬

‫‪*71‬‬
‫‪$WWLWXGH,QGLFDWRU‬‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪$LUVSHHG,QGLFDWRU‬‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪$OWLPHWHU‬‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪9HUWLFDO6SHHG‬‬
‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪,QGLFDWRU‬‬
‫‪7XUQDQG%DQN‬‬
‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪,QGLFDWRU‬‬
‫‪+HDGLQJ,QGLFDWRU‬‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪0DJQHWLF‬‬
‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪&RPSDVV‬‬
‫‪&ORFN‬‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪2$7,QGLFDWRU‬‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪3RZHU3ODQW‬‬
‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪,QVWUXPHQWV‬‬
‫(&‪6285‬‬

‫‪$XWRSLORW6$6‬‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪1DYLJDWLRQ‬‬
‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫ ‪5DGLR V‬‬
‫‪&RPPXQLFDWLRQ‬‬
‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫ ‪5DGLR V‬‬
‫‪(QJLQH5HOLJKW‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪)XHO9DOYH‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪3LWRW+HDW‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪3XOVH/LJKW‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪*HQHUDWRU‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪3RV/W‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪$QWL&ROO/W‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪/GJ/WV‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪*RY530,QFU‬‬
‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪'HFU‬‬
‫‪(QJ'HLFLQJ‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪+\G6\VWHP‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪5DGDU$OWLPHWHU‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪7$67&$6‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫;;;‪*7‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪$XGLR3DQHO‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪*71‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪)OLJKW6WUHDP‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪*0$RUF‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‬
‫‪7UDIILF6HQVRU‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪7UDIILF6HQVRU‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬

‫‪Figure 7-1 EMC Form Example‬‬

‫‪190-00734-20‬‬ ‫‪GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual‬‬


‫‪Rev. 4‬‬ ‫‪Page 7-12‬‬
7.4 GPS Antenna Performance
Integrity and accuracy of ADS-B Out GPS data has to meet criteria of AC 20-165B and be verified in-
flight. Flight check is required only if the GPS antenna installation is not shown to meet ADS-B Out
performance requirements. The check is optional otherwise.

NOTE
Antenna performance check is not required if the existing GPS antenna is located as
shown in Section 3.14 which details model specific GPS antenna locations that meet AC
20-165A requirements.

GPS antenna ADS-B Out in-flight performance is checked with the following procedure:
1. Fly the rotorcraft within FAA ADS-B ground station coverage for a minimum of one hour. Ensure
the rotorcraft has a clear view of the sky and a GPS position fix has been obtained prior to takeoff.
Perform the following maneuvers during the flight.
a. Straight and level flight for 1 minute.
b. Perform two separate left 360-degree turns at a speed of Vy + 10kts and 30 degree bank angle.
c. Perform two separate right 360-degree turns at a speed of Vy + 10kts and 30 degree bank
angle.
d. Perform two separate left 360-degree turns at a speed of 0.8 Vne or 0.8 Vh and 30 degree bank
angle.
e. Perform two separate right 360-degree turns at a speed of 0.8 Vne or 0.8 Vh and 30 degree
bank angle.
f. Fly a decelerating climb to achieve maximum positive deck angle for as long as possible or
one minute whichever is longer.
g. Two left and two right 360-degree turns at a speed of 0.8 Vne or 0.8 Vh and 30 degree bank
angle.
h. Fly an accelerating descent to achieve maximum negative deck angle for as long as possible or
one minute whichever is longer.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 7-13
2. Send an email to: 9-AWA-AFS-300-ADSB-AvionicsCheck@faa.gov, requesting an “ADS-B
Aircraft Operation Compliance Report” for the flight. The e-mail must include the aircraft
registration number or applicable call sign, 24-bit address, date, and location and time of the flight.
3. The following transmitted parameters must be achieved during the flight within the tolerance
noted below –
• NIC > 7
• NACp > 8
• NACv > 1
• SIL = 3
• SDA = 2

NOTE
There may be occurrences where the required parameters were not achieved. This does
not constitute a failure if they are infrequent, are less than 5 seconds in duration and total
less than 0.50% of the flight.

4. Under the Integrity & Accuracy section of the report obtained in step 2, verify MCF is less than 5,
and % Fail is less than 0.50% for NIC, NACp, NACv, SIL, and SDA.
If required integrity and accuracy parameters were not achieved throughout the flight, there may be an
issue with the installation, which must be resolved prior to returning the rotorcraft to service.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 7-14
7.5 Documentation
7.5.1 Rotorcraft Flight Manual Supplement
The Rotorcraft Flight Manual Supplement (RFMS) must be inserted in the Rotorcraft Flight Manual
(RFM) or Pilot's Operating Handbook (POH).
It must be ensured that RFMS has:
1. The required rotorcraft information filled in.
2. Appropriate check boxes in the Installation Configuration section filled in, as described in
section 4.4.
7.5.2 Instructions for Continued Airworthiness

NOTE
Dual GTX installations require that each GTX 3X5 has a Configuration Log completed.

Appendices A.1 through A.6 of GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML Maintenance Manual/ICA must be filled out,
included as part of the FAA Form 337, and filed with the aircraft permanent records. These appendices
document GTX 3X5 installation details that are essential to system maintenance and are a part of the
rotorcraft Instructions for Continued Airworthiness. The installer must document the following details in
the appendices:
1. General rotorcraft and GTX transponder specific information.
2. Electrical load analysis.
3. Equipment interfaced to the installed GTX transponder.
4. Configuration Log of installed GTX transponder(s) (a printout of the GTX 3X5 configuration from
the GTX 3X5 Installation Tool is also acceptable).
5. Location of the GTX 3X5 transponder and interfacing antenna(s) as installed in the rotorcraft,
including wire routing.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 7-15
8 CONNECTOR PINOUT
8.1 GTX 3X5 ..........................................................................................................................................8-1
8.1.1 GTX 335/335R/345/345R (J3251)..........................................................................................8-2
8.1.2 GTX 345/345R (J3452) .........................................................................................................8-5
8.1.3 GTX 3X5 Power and Lighting Inputs.....................................................................................8-6
8.1.4 GTX 3X5 Power Control Input...............................................................................................8-7
8.1.5 GTX 3X5 Encoded Altitude Inputs ........................................................................................8-7
8.1.6 GTX 3X5 Discrete Outputs.....................................................................................................8-8
8.1.7 GTX 3X5 Discrete Inputs .......................................................................................................8-9

NOTE
The information in this section is to select interfaces and function capabilities. It is not to
be used to find other manufacturer’s interfaced component requirements. Refer to
interfaced equipment manufacturer’s installation manuals for equipment specific
requirements.
8.1 GTX 3X5
This section gives the pin functions, inputs, and outputs of the GTX 3X5 series transponders.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 8-1
8.1.1 GTX 335/335R/345/345R (J3251)

21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22

62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43

Figure 8-1 Connector J3251 Rear View

Table 8-1 GTX 3X5 J3251 Pin Assignments

Pin Pin Name I/O


1 ALT ENCODER/CONFIG MODULE CLOCK In/Out
2 USB DATA HI In/Out
3 TEMP PROBE IN In
4 TIME MARK A Out
5 ARINC 429 OUT A Out
6 ARINC 429 OUT B Out
7 RS-232 OUT 3 Out
8 RS-232 OUT 2 Out
9 RS-232 OUT 1 Out
10 ALTITUDE A1 In
11 ALTITUDE B1 In
12 ALTITUDE C1 In
13 ALTITUDE D4 In
14 EXTERNAL STANDBY SELECT In
15 CONFIGURABLE DISCRETE 1 In/Out
16 CONFIGURABLE DISCRETE 2 In/Out
17 XPDR FAIL 1 Out
18 EXTERNAL SUPPRESSION In/Out
19 LIGHTING BUS HI In
20 AIRCRAFT GROUND --
21 AIRCRAFT POWER 1 In
22 ALT ENCODER/CONFIG MODULE DATA In/Out
23 ALT ENCODER/CONFIG MODULE GND --
24 USB DATA LO In/Out
25 TEMP PROBE OUT Out

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 8-2
Pin Pin Name I/O
26 TIME MARK B Out
27 ARINC 429 IN 1A In
28 ARINC 429 IN 1B In
29 RS-232 IN 3 In
30 RS-232 IN 2 In
31 RS-232 IN 1 In
32 ALTITUDE A2 In
33 ALTITUDE B2 In
34 ALTITUDE C2 In
35 RESERVED In
36 EXTERNAL IDENT SELECT In
37 AUDIO INHIBIT 2 In
38 POWER CONTROL In
39 SWITCHED POWER OUT Out
40 LIGHTING BUS LO In
41 AIRCRAFT GROUND In
42 AIRCRAFT POWER 1 In
43 ALT ENCODER/CONFIG MODULE POWER In
44 USB VBUS POWER In/Out
45 USB GND --
46 AUDIO OUT HI Out
47 AUDIO OUT LO Out
48 ARINC 429 IN 2A In
49 ARINC 429 IN 2B In
50 RS-232 GND 3 --
51 RS-232 GND 2 --
52 RS-232 GND 1 --
53 ALTITUDE A4 In
54 ALTITUDE B4 In
55 ALTITUDE C4 In
56 ALTITUDE GROUND --
57 SQUAT (COLLECTIVE) SWITCH In
58 AIR DATA SELECT In

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 8-3
Pin Pin Name I/O
59 POWER CONFIG In
60 GPS KEEP ALIVE In
61 AIRCRAFT POWER 2 In
62 AIRCRAFT POWER 2 In

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 8-4
8.1.2 GTX 345/345R (J3452)

5 4 3 2 1

10 9 8 7 6

15 14 13 12 11

Figure 8-2 Connector J3252 Rear View

Table 8-2 GTX 345 J3252 Pin Assignments

Pin Pin Name I/O


1 ETHERNET OUT 1B Out
2 ETHERNET IN 1B In
3 ETHERNET OUT 2B Out
4 ETHERNET IN 2B In
5 RS-232 OUT 4 Out
6 ETHERNET OUT 1A Out
7 ETHERNET IN 1A In
8 ETHERNET OUT 2A Out
9 ETHERNET IN 2A In
10 RS-232 IN 4 In
11 RS-422 A Out
12 RS-422 B Out
13 CONFIGURABLE DISCRETE 11 In/Out
14 CONFIGURABLE DISCRETE 12 In/Out
15 RS-232 GND 4 --

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 8-5
8.1.3 GTX 3X5 Power and Lighting Inputs
Power and lighting input requirements are recorded in this section. Refer to appendix B for power and
lighting interconnections.
• The power input pins accept 14/28 VDC.
• AIRCRAFT POWER 2 is used to connect to an alternate power source.
• Switched Power Out is a power source available for a remote digital altitude encoder device.
• The GTX 3X5 unit can adjust to a 28 VDC, 14 VDC, or 5 VDC lighting bus.
• The GTX 3X5 automatically adjust for ambient lighting conditions because of the photocell.

Table 8-3 Lighting/Power Pin Assignments

P3251 Pin
Pin Name I/O GTX Unit
Number
AV PWR 1 21 I ALL
AV PWR 1 42 I ALL
AV PWR 2 61 I ALL
AV PWR 2 62 I ALL
GROUND (power ground) 20 I ALL
GROUND (power ground) 41 I ALL
SW PWR OUT 39 O ALL
GPS KEEP ALIVE 60 I ALL
LTNG HI 19 I Panel Mount
LTNG LO 40 I Panel Mount

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 8-6
8.1.4 GTX 3X5 Power Control Input
The PWR CONFIG input sets the remote on/off feature. This is connected to ground for a remote unit
installation and not connected for a panel mount unit installation.
The PWR CONTROL input is dependent on the PWR CONFIG connection. This is used as a remote
power on/off control or to use the power auto on feature when the avionics master is energized.
Table 8-4 GTX 3X5 Power Control Inputs

Pin Name Pin Number I/O Connector


PWR CONFIG 59 I P3251
PWR CONTROL 38 I P3251

8.1.5 GTX 3X5 Encoded Altitude Inputs


• Parallel Gray code altitude inputs are active if the voltage to ground is < 1.9 V or the resistance to
ground is < 375 Ω.
• These inputs are inactive if the voltage to ground is 11-33 VDC.
• The GTX 3X5 discrete I/O pins are configurable.
• If the Gillham input is not used in the configuration menu, then the Gillham code altitude pins can
be used for other discrete input functions.
• If the Gillham input is used these pins will not be available for selection on other discrete inputs in
the configuration menu.

Table 8-5 GTX 3X5 Encoded Altitude Inputs

Pin Connect
Pin Name I/O
Number or
ALTITUDE A1 10 In J3251
ALTITUDE A2 32 In J3251
ALTITUDE A4 53 In J3251
ALTITUDE B1 11 In J3251
ALTITUDE B2 33 In J3251
ALTITUDE B4 54 In J3251
ALTITUDE C1 12 In J3251
ALTITUDE C2 34 In J3251
ALTITUDE C4 55 In J3251
ALTITUDE D4 13 In J3251
ALTITUDE COMMON 56 -- J3251

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 8-7
8.1.6 GTX 3X5 Discrete Outputs
Table 8-6 GTX 3X5 Discrete Outputs

Pin Name Pin Number Unit I/O Connector


TRANSPONDER FAIL #1 17 ALL OUT J3251
EXTERNAL SUPPRESSION I/O 18 ALL IN/OUT J3251
REPLY ACTIVE X** ALL OUT J3251/J3252
TRANSPONDER FAIL #2 X** ALL OUT J3251/J3252
ALTITUDE ALERT ANNUNCIATE* X** ALL OUT J3251/J3252
ADS-B FUNCTION FAILURE X** ALL OUT J3251/J3252
TRAFFIC ALERT X** GTX 345/345R OUT J3251/J3252
TRAFFIC STANDBY/OPERATE 15, 16, or 17 GTX 345/345R OUT J3251
TRAFFIC TEST 15, 16, or 17 GTX 345/345R OUT J3251
* INACTIVE: 10 ≤ Vin ≤ 33 VDC or Rin ≥ 100 KΩ (open)
ACTIVE: Vin ≤ 1.9 VDC with ≥ 75 μA sink current or Rin ≤ 375 Ω (grounded)
Sink current is internally limited to 200 μA max for grounded pin.
** X shows that this discrete output can be used by any available configurable discrete output pin on the
indicated connector(s). Refer to section 8.1 for a list of configurable pins.

Table 8-7 GTX 3X5 Configurable Discrete Output Pins

Pin Name Pin Number Unit I/O Connector


TRANSPONDER FAIL #1 17 ALL OUT J3251
CONFIGURABLE DISCRETE #1 15 ALL IN/OUT J3251
CONFIGURABLE DISCRETE #2 16 ALL IN/OUT J3251
CONFIGURABLE DISCRETE #11 13 GTX 345/345R IN/OUT J3252
CONFIGURABLE DISCRETE #12 14 GTX 345/345R IN/OUT J3252

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 8-8
8.1.7 GTX 3X5 Discrete Inputs
Table 8-8 GTX 3X5 Discrete Inputs

Pin
Pin Name Unit I/O Connector
Number
TIS-A SELECT* X** GTX 335/335R IN J3251/J3252
ALTITUDE DATA SELECT* X** ALL IN J3251/J3252
AUDIO INHIBIT #1*
X** ALL IN J3251/J3252
(AUDIO MUTE)
AUDIO INHIBIT #2*
37 ALL IN J3251
(AUDIO CANCEL)
AIR DATA SELECT* 58 ALL IN J3251
SQUAT (COLLECTIVE) SWITCH 57 ALL IN J3251
EXTERNAL IDENT* 36 ALL IN J3251
EXTERNAL STANDBY* 14 ALL IN J3251
EXTERNAL SUPPRESSION I/O 18 ALL IN/OUT J3251
ID SELECT X** ALL IN J3251/J3252
* INACTIVE: 10 ≤ Vin ≤ 33 VDC or Rin ≥ 100 KΩ (open)
ACTIVE: Vin ≤ 1.9 VDC with ≥ 75 μA sink current or Rin ≤ 375 Ω (grounded)
Sink current is internally limited to 200 μA max for grounded pin.
** X shows that this discrete output can be used by any available configurable discrete output pin on the
indicated connector(s). Refer to section 8.1 for a list of configurable pins.

Table 8-9 GTX 3X5 Configurable Discrete Input Pins

Pin
Pin Name Unit I/O Connector
Number
AUDIO INHIBIT #2*
37 ALL IN J3251
(AUDIO CANCEL)
AIR DATA SELECT* 58 ALL IN J3251
SQUAT (COLLECTIVE) SWITCH 57 ALL IN J3251
EXTERNAL IDENT* 36 ALL IN J3251
EXTERNAL STANDBY* 14 ALL IN J3251
CONFIGURABLE DISCRETE #1 15 ALL IN/OUT J3251
CONFIGURABLE DISCRETE #2 16 ALL IN/OUT J3251
CONFIGURABLE DISCRETE #11 13 GTX 345/345R IN/OUT J3252
CONFIGURABLE DISCRETE #12 14 GTX 345/345R IN/OUT J3252

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page 8-9
APPENDIX A INSTALLATION DRAWING
Table A-1 Bill of Material
QTY
OPTION 1

OPTION 2

OPTION 3

OPTION 4
ITEM NO. PART NO. DESCRIPTION

010-01214-01 GTX 335, STANDARD KIT


010-01214-21 GTX 335 NV, STANDARD KIT
1 1 - - 1 010-01214-41 GTX 335 GPS, STANDARD KIT OR
010-01216-01 GTX 345, STANDARD KIT
010-01216-41 GTX 345 GPS, STANDARD KIT
010-01215-01 GTX 335 REMOTE, STANDARD KIT
010-01215-41 GTX 335 REMOTE GPS, STANDARD KIT
- - 1 1 2 OR
010-01217-01 GTX 345 REMOTE, STANDARD KIT
010-01217-41 GTX 345 REMOTE GPS, STANDARD KIT
010-01215-02 GTX 335 REMOTE, VERTICAL MOUNT, STANDARD KIT
010-01215-42 GTX 335 REMOTE GPS, VERTICAL MOUNT, STANDARD KIT
- - 1 1 3 OR
010-01217-02 GTX 345 REMOTE, VERTICAL MOUNT, STANDARD KIT
010-01217-42 GTX 345 REMOTE GPS, VERTICAL MOUNT, STANDARD KIT
6 6 4 MS24693-S26 SCREW, MACHINE, FLAT, COUNTERSUNK HEAD 100 DEG, CROSS-RECESSED, 0.138-32 UNC-2A, 0.375 IN LONG
6 6 5 MS21071-06 NUT, SELF LOCKING, PLATE, ONE LUG, REDUCED RIVET SPACING, LOW HEIGHT, STEEL .138-32 UNC-3B
12 12 12 - 6 MS20426AD3-3 RIVET, SOLID, COUNTERSUNK 100 DEG, PRECISION HEAD, 3/32 IN OD. 3/16 IN LONG
- - 6 - 7 MS21069L3 NUT, SELF-LOCKING, PLATE, TWO-LUG, REDUCED RIVET SPACING, LOW HEIGHT, STEEL .190-32 UNJF-3B
- - 6 6 8 MS24693-S273 SCREW, MACHINE, FLAT, COUNTERSUNK HEAD 100 DEG, CROSS-RECESSED .190-32 UNF-2A, 0.625 IN LONG
- - - 6 9 NAS1835A-3 INSERT, SCREW THREAD, MOLDED IN, BLIND THREADED, SELF-LOCKING, FLOATING, SANDWICH PANEL, 0.190-32 UNJF-3B
(1) (1) 10 011-03080-00 GAE ALTITUDE ENCODER, STANDARD KIT
(1) (1) 11 AN840-4D ADAPTER, STRAIGHT, 1/8 PIPE TO 1/4 HOSE
(1) (1) 12 LED-40-17-HAI-E1G30 ANNUNCIATOR, TRAFFIC, VIVISUN
(1) (1) 13 18-200 PLUG, QUICK CONNECT, VIVISUN
- (4 IN) 14 QQB575F36T781 BRAID, COPPER WIRE, TIN-COATED, FLAT, 0.750X0.040 IN, QQ-B-575
- (2) 15 MS20659-130 TERMINAL, LUG, CRIMP STYLE, COPPER, UNINSULATED, RING TONGUE, NO. 6 WIRE, Ø0.190 IN STUD
- (2) 16 MS27039-1-08 SCREW, MACHINE, PAN HEAD, STRUCTURAL, CROSS RECESSED .190-32 UNF-3A, 0.531 IN
- (2) 17 NAS1149F0332P WASHER, FLAT, STEEL, CAD PLATED, 0.032 INCH THICK, ID 0.203, OD 0.438
- (1) 18 AN970-3 WASHER, FLAT Ø0.203 ID, Ø0.875 OD, 0.063 IN THICK
- - (A/R) 19 436 DEAD SOFT ALUMINUM FOIL, ADHESIVE BACKED, 0.0072 IN, 3M

NOTES:
[1] GTX 3X5 UNIT INSTALLATION OPTIONS INCLUDE -
(a) OPTION 1 - INSTALLATION OF PANEL MOUNTED UNIT IN ROTORCRAFT AVIONICS CONSOLE OR INSTRUMENT PANEL SUPPORT [FIGURE A-1, SHEETS 1 AND 2].
(b) OPTION 2 - INSTALLATION OF PANEL MOUNTED UNIT IN ROTORCRAFT INSTRUMENT PANEL [FIGURE A-2, SHEETS 1 AND 2].
(c) OPTION 3 - INSTALLATION OF REMOTE MOUNTED UNIT ON EXISTING ROTORCRAFT SHEET METAL EQUIPMENT SHELF [FIGURE A-3].
(d) OPTION 4 - INSTALLATION OF REMOTE MOUNTED UNIT ON EXISTING ROTORCRAFT SANDWICH EQUIPMENT SHELF [FIGURE A-4].
[2] GTX 3X5 INSTALLATION OPTIONS SHOWN ARE TYPICAL EXAMPLES AND SHOULD BE ADOPTED TO ACTUAL DESIGN OF MODEL SPECIFIC INSTRUMENT PANEL,
AVIONICS CONSOLE, INSTRUMENT PANEL SUPPORT, OR REMOTE EQUIPMENT SHELF. REFER TO MODEL SPECIFIC ILLUSTRATED PARTS CATALOG FOR DETAILS.
[3] ITEMS IN TABLE A-1 WITH QUANTITY SHOWN IN BRACKETS (*) ARE OPTIONAL.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page A-1
SECTION A-A

REF. 115-01771-01 REF. EXISTING


INSTALL RACK, GTX 3x5 ROTORCRAFT CONSOLE
PART OF ITEM 1

NOTES:
1 UNIT INSTALL RACK SHOULD BE POSITIONED SUCH THAT THE TAB ON THE RACK LOWER SHELF IS FLUSH
WITH THE FRONT FACE OF ROTORCRAFT CONSOLE, AS SHOWN IN SECTION A-A.
UNIT INSTALL RACK SHALL BE LOCATED WITHIN THE AREA DESIGNATED BY ROTORCRAFT
MANUFACTURER FOR INSTALLATION OF CONSOLE MOUNTED AVIONICS.
WEIGHT LIMIT FOR CONSOLE MOUNTED AVIONICS, IF SPECIFIED, SHALL BE OBSERVED WHEN ADDING
GTX 3X5 TRANSPONDER.

Figure A-1 Option 1 GTX 3X5 Rack Installation, Rotorcraft Console/Instrument Panel Support
Sheet 1 of 2

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page A-2
DETAIL B

EXISTING ROTORCRAFT CONSOLE

7 DRILL 0.098 AND


B 0.184-100
TYP. 12 PLCS

6 DRILL 0.141
TYP. 6 PLCS

5 9 REF. 115-01771-01
INSTALL RACK, GTX 3x5

PART OF ITEM 1

NOTES:
1 BALLOON NUMBERS REFER TO TABLE A-1.
2 WHEN INSTALLED, UNIT INSTALL RACK IS ATTACHED TO CONSOLE STRUCTURE WITH FOUR (4) FASTENERS AT THE FRONT OF THE
RACK AND TWO (2) FASTENERS AT THE BACK OF THE RACK, AS SHOWN.
3 INSTALLATION OF GTX 3X5 UNIT AND CONNECTOR BACKPLATE NOT SHOWN. REFER TO SHEET 9 FOR DETAILS.
4 RIVETS ARE INSTALLED PER MIL-STD-403 PREPARATION FOR AND INSTALLATION OF RIVETS AND SCREWS, ROCKET MISSILE AND
AIRFRAME STRUCTURES.
5 UNIT INSTALL RACK IS POSITIONED AS SHOWN IN ),*85($, SHEET 1. 8 4
6
6 FASTENER HOLE LOCATIONS TO MATCH 115-0771-01 INSTALL RACK.
6
7 FASTENER HOLE LOCATIONS TO MATCH NUTPLATE, ITEM 5 12
5
8 TORQUE .1380-32 UNC-2A (NO. 6) FASTENERS 10-12 IN-LBS. 6
9 GTX 3X5 UNIT MUST BE ELECTRICALLY BONDED TO ROTORCRAFT INSTRUMENT PANEL SUPPORT/CONSOLE WITH DIRECT CURRENT
(DC) RESISTANCE LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO 2.5 MILLIOHMS. THE RESISTANCE MEASUREMENT MUST BE PERFORMED WITH A 4-WIRE
MILLIOHM METER AFTER THE GTX 3X5 IS INSTALLED.

Figure A-1 Option 1 GTX 3X5 Rack Installation, Rotorcraft Console/Instrument Panel Support
Sheet 2 of 2

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page A-3
DETAIL E DETAIL D
TYPICAL ANNUNCIATOR CUTOUT TYPICAL PANEL CUTOUT
SCALE 1 : 1 R0.04 SCALE 2 : 3
R0.06 TYP.

1.67
2 0.70 TYP.
SECTION C-C
6.30 SCALE 1 : 2

1 REF. 115-01771-01
INSTALL RACK, GTX 3x5

PART OF ITEM 1

REF. EXISTING ROTORCRAFT


INSTRUMENT PANEL

REF. EXISTING ROTORCRAFT D


INSTRUMENT PANEL C C
NOTES:
1 UNIT INSTALL RACK SHOULD BE POSITIONED SUCH THAT THE TAB ON THE RACK LOWER SHELF IS FLUSH WITH THE FRONT FACE OF
ROTORCRAFT INSTRUMENT PANEL, AS SHOWN IN SECTION C-C.
UNIT INSTALL RACK SHALL BE LOCATED WITHIN THE AREA DESIGNATED BY ROTORCRAFT MANUFACTURER FOR INSTALLATION OF
INSTRUMENT PANEL MOUNTED AVIONICS.
WEIGHT LIMIT FOR PANEL MOUNTED AVIONICS, IF SPECIFIED, SHALL BE OBSERVED WHEN GTX 3X5 TRANSPONDER IS INSTALLED.
2 TRAFFIC ANNUNCIATOR IS OPTIONAL. SPARE ANNUNCIATOR IN EXISTING CAUTION AND WARNING PANEL SHOULD BE USED, OR NEW
ANNUNCIATOR INSTALLED IN AREA ADJACENT TO EXISTING CAUTION AND WARNING PANEL SO THE PILOT HAS A CLEAR, UNOBSTRUCTED,
AND UNDISTORTED VIEW OF THE ANNUNCIATOR.

Figure A-2 Option 2 GTX 3X5 Rack Installation, Rotorcraft Instrument Panel
Sheet 1 of 2

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page A-4
10 MOUNTING SLEEVE
PART OF ANNUNCIATOR

13
1

REF. EXISTING ROTORCRAFT


INSTRUMENT PANEL
12 REF. EXISTING SUPPORT STRUCTURE
1 2024-T3 ALUMINUM
0.032 IN THICK MINIMUM

7 DRILL 0.141
TYP. 6 PLCS
NOTES:
1 BALLOON NUMBERS REFER TO TABLE
WHEN INSTALLED, UNIT INSTALL RACK IS ATTACHED TO INSTRUMENT PANEL SUPPORT STRUCTURE 5
WITH FOUR (4) FASTENERS AT THE FRONT OF THE RACK AND TWO (2) FASTENERS AT THE BACK OF THE
RACK, AS SHOWN. 6
INSTALLATION OF GTX 3X5 UNIT AND CONNECTOR BACKPLATE NOT SHOWN. REFER TO SHEET 9 FOR
DETAILS.
RIVETS ARE INSTALLED PER MIL-STD-403 PREPARATION FOR AND INSTALLATION OF RIVETS AND
SCREWS, ROCKET MISSILE AND AIRFRAME STRUCTURES.

UNIT INSTALL RACK IS POSITIONED AS SHOWN IN ),*85($, SHEET . 6


12
USE SPACERS IF DISTANCE BETWEEN EXISTING BRACKETS, PART OF INSTRUMENT PANEL SUPPORT
STRUCTURE, IS GREATER THAN THE WIDTH OF GTX 3X5 INSTALL RACK. REFER TO ROTORCRAFT
MANUFACTURER STANDARD PRACTICES MANUAL, OR STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL, FOR SPACER 8 DRILL 0.098 AND
FABRICATION DETAILS. 0.184-100
TYP. 12 PLCS
FASTENER HOLE LOCATIONS TO MATCH GTX 3X5 INSTALL RACK.

FASTENER HOLE LOCATIONS TO MATCH NUTPLATE, ITEM 45.


5 6 11 REF. 115-01771-01
INSTALL RACK, GTX 3x5
TORQUE .1380-32 UNC-2A (NO. 6) FASTENERS 10-12 IN-LBS.
PART OF ITEM 1
10 ANNUNCIATOR MOUNTING SLEEVE TO MAINTAIN ELECTRICAL BOND TO EXISTING INSTRUMENT PANEL
:,7+/(667+$1Pƻ 4 9
6
11 GTX 3X5 UNIT MUST BE ELECTRICALLY BONDED TO ROTORCRAFT INSTRUMENT PANEL WITH DIRECT
CURRENT (DC) RESISTANCE LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO 2.5 MILLIOHMS. THE RESISTANCE MEASUREMENT
MUST BE PERFORMED WITH A 4-WIRE MILLIOHM METER AFTER THE GTX 3X5 IS INSTALLED.

Figure A-2 Option 2 GTX 3X5 Rack Installation, Rotorcraft Instrument Panel
Sheet 2 of 2

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page A-5
8 REF. 011-03762-00
KIT, VERTICAL MOUNT, GTX 3X5 REMOTE
PART OF ITEM 3

6
12
7 8
6
7
6

5 DRILL 0.201
TYP. 6 PLCS

6 DRILL 0.098
0.184-100
TYP. 12 PLCS

10
MIN.

MAX. 4 REF. EXISTING SHELF


6.00 [B
RACK [2024-T3 ALUMINUM, MIN. 0.063 IN THICK
ET SP
ACING
] MIN. 0.50 INCH FLANGE]

MAX. 0.80
REF. EXISTING BRACKET, TYP.
[2024-T3 ALUMINUM, MIN. 0.040 IN THICK]

NOTES:
1 BALLOON NUMBERS REFER TO TABLE A-1.
2 GTX 3X5R TRANSPONDER CAN BE INSTALLED ON EXISTING SHELF (OR OTHER STRUCTURE) DESIGNATED BY ROTORCRAFT MANUFACTURER FOR REMOTE MOUNTED
EQUIPMENT. ADDITION OF GTX 3X5 INSTALL RACK FASTENERS TO EXISTING SHELF IS IN ACCORDANCE WITH ROTORCRAFT MODEL SPECIFIC STANDARD PRACTICE
MANUAL OR MAINTENANCE MANUAL.
3 RIVETS ARE INSTALLED PER MIL-STD-403 PREPARATION FOR AND INSTALLATION OF RIVETS AND SCREWS, ROCKET MISSILE AND AIRFRAME STRUCTURES.
4 COMBINED WEIGHT OF EQUIPMENT INSTALLED ON THE SHELF, INCLUDING GTX 3X5 TRANSPONDER, SHALL REMAIN WITHIN SHELF LIMITS, AS INDICATED BY A
PLACARD OR OTHER PUBLISHED LIMITATION.

5 FASTENER HOLE LOCATIONS TO MATCH GTX 3X5 INSTALL RACK.


6 FASTENER HOLE LOCATIONS TO MATCH NUTPLATE, ITEM 6.

7 TORQUE .1900-32 UNF-2A (NO. 19) FASTENERS 20-25 IN-LBS.

8 GTX 3X5 UNIT MUST BE ELECTRICALLY BONDED TO EXISTING ROTORCRAFT EQUIPMENT SHELF WITH DIRECT CURRENT (DC) RESISTANCE LESS THAN OR
EQUAL TO 2.5 MILLIOHMS. THE RESISTANCE MEASUREMENT MUST BE PERFORMED WITH A 4-WIRE MILLIOHM METER AFTER THE GTX 3X5 IS INSTALLED.
CONNECTION OF EXISTING SHELF TO ROTORCRAFT GROUND PLANE MAY REQUIRE INSTALLATION OF BONDING STRAP.

Figure A-3 Option 3 GTX 3X5 Remote Installation, Vertical Mount, Existing Sheet Metal Equipment Shelf

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page A-6
9
7
7 REF. 011-03762-00 6 8
KIT, VERTICAL MOUNT, GTX 3X5 REMOTE 6
PART OF ITEM 3

16 6
5 DRILL 0.685 0.45IN 2
TYP. 6 PLCS
18
7 1
17
2 15
2 14
4 IN

MAX.
6.0 [B
RACKET S
PACIN
G]

4 REF. EXISTING SHELF


NOTES: [SANDWICH PANEL 0.50 IN THICK]
1 BALLOON NUMBERS REFER TO TABLE A-1.
2 ADDITION OF GTX 3X5 INSTALL RACK FASTENERS TO EXISTING EQUIPMENT SHELF IN ACCORDANCE WITH ROTORCRAFT MODEL REF. EXISTING BRACKET, TYP.

MAX. 0.80
SPECIFIC STANDARD PRACTICE MANUAL, OR MAINTENANCE MANUAL, OR THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE - [2024-T3 ALUMINUM, MIN. 0.040 IN THICK]
(1) DRILL HOLE INTO THE PANEL AS SHOWN IN FIGURES 1 AND 2.A MINIMUM OF 0.040 INCHES CLEARANCE IS RECOMMENDED TO ALLOW THE
ADHESIVE TO FLOW UNDER AND AROUND THE INSERT 7 DRILL 0.685 0.45IN
(2) UNDERCUT HONEYCOMB CORE 0.125 TO 0.250 INCHES AS SHOWN IN FIGURE 3.
(3) PLACE POTTED-IN INSERT INTO THE HOLE. USE ADHESIVE BACKED INSTALLATION TAB TO KEEP THE INSERT FLUSH WITH PANEL FACE AND
FROM FALLING ALL THE WAY INTO THE HOLE.
(4) INJECT POTTING ADHESIVE AS SHOWN IN FIGURE 4.
(5) AFTER THE ADHESIVE HAS CURED, REMOVE THE TAB AND CLEAN PANEL AND INSERT AS REQUIRED.

3 IF NOT SPECIFIED IN ROTORCRAFT MAINTENANCE MANUAL OR STANDARD PRACTICES MANUAL, PREFERRED POTTING ADHESIVE
IS TWO-COMPONENT SYNTACTIC MEDIUM DENSITY EPOXY ADHESIVE MANUFACTURED BY:
HUNTSMAN ADVANCED MATERIALS AMERICA'S INC. ADHESIVE PART NUMBERS
10003 WOODLOCH FOREST DRIVE 1. EPOCAST 1618-D/B, OR
THE WOODLANDS 2. EPOCAST 1633-A/B, OR
TEXAS 77380, USA 3. EPOCAST 1652-A/B
TEL. +1 888 564 9318

4 COMBINED WEIGHT OF EQUIPMENT INSTALLED ON THE SHELF, INCLUDING GTX 3X5 TRANSPONDER, SHALL REMAIN WITHIN
SHELF LIMITS, AS INDICATED BY A PLACARD OR OTHER PUBLISHED LIMITATION.
5 FASTENER HOLE LOCATIONS TO MATCH GTX 3X5 INSTALL RACK.
6 TORQUE .1900-32 UNF-2A (NO. 19) FASTENERS 20-25 IN-LBS.
7 GTX 3X5 UNIT MUST BE ELECTRICALLY BONDED TO EXISTING ROTORCRAFT EQUIPMENT SHELF WITH DIRECT CURRENT (DC)
RESISTANCE LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO 2.5 MILLIOHMS. THE RESISTANCE MEASUREMENT MUST BE PERFORMED WITH A 4-WIRE
MILLIOHM METER AFTER THE GTX 3X5 IS INSTALLED. CONNECTION OF EXISTING SHELF TO ROTORCRAFT GROUND PLANE MAY
REQUIRE INSTALLATION OF BONDING STRAP -
(1) BONDING STRAP IS INSTALLED WITH LARGE AREA WASHER BETWEEN THE STRAP RING TERMINAL AND THE SHELF.
(2) BONDING STRAP SHOULD BE AS SHORT AS PRACTICAL, BUT NO LONGER THAN 5.0 INCHES (BRAID LENGTH 4.0 INCHES).
(3) EQUIPMENT SHELF MUST BE PREPARED FOR ELECTRICAL BOND IN AREAS UNDER THE GTX 3X5R RACK AND LARGE AREA WASHER.

Figure A-4 Option 4 GTX 3X5 Remote Installation, Vertical Mount, Existing Sandwich Panel Equipment Shelf [Conductive]

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page A-7
2 REF. 011-03762-00
KIT, VERTICAL MOUNT, GTX 3X5 REMOTE
PART OF ITEM 3

4 16
2 17
2 15
2
2.5 M
IN 19 3
A/R 14 3
MIN 4 IN
10.0

TO N
STRU EAREST
5.0 M CTUR ROTO
AX. E (GR RCRA
OUND FT ME
PLAN TALLI
E) C

REF. EXISTING SHELF

DETAIL F 18 3
SCALE 1 : 1 1
1.1
9
1

DRILL 0.685 0.45IN


NOTES:
1 BALLOON NUMBERS REFER TO TABLE A-1.
2 GTX 3X5 UNIT MUST BE ELECTRICALLY BONDED TO THE NEAREST METALLIC ROTORCRAFT STRUCTURE (GROUND PLANE) WITH DIRECT
CURRENT (DC) RESISTANCE LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO 2.5 MILLIOHMS. THE RESISTANCE MEASUREMENT MUST BE PERFORMED WITH A 4-WIRE
MILLIOHM METER AFTER THE GTX 3X5 IS INSTALLED.
3 INSTALLATION OF GTX 3X5 UNIT ON EXISTING NON-METALLIC/NON-CONDUCTIVE EQUIPMENT SHELF REQUIRES -
(1) UNIT RACK TO BE MOUNTED ON TOP OF ALUMINUM PLATE. PLATE SIZE TO BE AT LEAST 0.5 INCH GREATER THAN THE FOOTPRINT OF THE
UNIT RACK AND MINIMUM 0.032 INCH THICK.
(2) DEAD SOFT ALUMINUM FOIL TAPE APPLIED TO SHELF SURFACE. FOIL WIDTH BE EQUAL OR GRATER TO THE WIDTH OF ALUMINUM PLATE,
AND LENGTH TO WIDTH RATIO MAY NOT EXCEED 7:1. FOIL SHALL HAVE NO TEARS AND GROUNDING END FOLDED OVER MINIMUM TWICE.
(3) BONDING STRAP INSTALLED WITH LARGE AREA WASHER BETWEEN THE STRAP RING TERMINAL AND ALUMINUM FOIL. BONDING STRAP
SHOULD BE AS SHORT AS PRACTICAL, BUT NO LONGER THAN 5.0 INCHES (BRAID LENGTH 4.0 INCHES).
4 TORQUE .1900-32 UNF-2A (NO. 19) FASTENERS 20-25 IN-LBS.

Figure A-5 Option 4 GTX 3X5 Grounding, Remote Installation, Vertical Mount, Existing Equipment Shelf [Non-Conductive]

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page A-8
Table A-2 Part Numbers [Panel Mounted Unit]
Standard Kit Description Unit Install Rack Backplate Connector Kit
010-01214-01 GTX 335 011-03300-00
010-01214-21 GTX 335 NV 011-03300-20 115-01771-01 011-02976-00 011-02977-00
010-01216-01 GTX 345 011-03302-00
010-01214-41 GTX 335 GPS 011-03300-40
115-01771-01 011-02976-01 011-02977-01
010-01216-41 GTX 345 GPS 011-03302-40

CONNECTOR KIT
PART OF ITEM 1

BACKPLATE ASSEMBLY
PART OF ITEM 1
3 REF. 211-63234-08 SCREW,
FLAT HEAD 0.1120-40 UNC-2A
PART OF CONNECTOR KIT

1
1

3 REF. 211-60234-08 SCREW,


PAN HEAD 0.1120-40 UNC-2A
REF. 115-01771-01 INSTALL RACK PART OF ITEM 10
PART OF ITEM 1

3 REF. 211-60234-08 SCREW, PAN HEAD 0.1120-40 UNC-2A


PART OF BACKPLATE ASSEMBLY

10
GTX 3X5 TRANSPONDER UNIT
1
PART OF ITEM 1
2 GAE ALTITUDE ENCODER
11 INSTALLATION
1

NOTES:
1 BALLOON NUMBERS REFER TO TABLE A-1.

2 INSTALLATION OF GAE ALTITUDE ENCODER IS OPTIONAL.

3 TORQUE .1120-40 UNC-2A (NO. 4) FASTENERS 6-8 IN-LBS.

Figure A-6 Standard Kit, GTX 3X5 Transponder Panel Mounted

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page A-9
Table A-3 Weight and Center of Gravity
Panel Mounted Unit
Weight Dimensions in [mm]
Standard Kit
lbs [kg] A B C
010-01214-01 2.8 [1.27] 4.5 [114] 3.2 [81] 0.8 [20]
010-01214-21 2.8 [1.27] 4.5 [114] 3.2 [81] 0.8 [20]
010-01214-41 2.9 [1.32] 4.5 [114] 3.2 [81] 0.8 [20]
010-01216-01 3.1 [1.41] 4.7 [119] 3.0 [76] 0.8 [20]
010-01216-41 3.2 [1.45] 4.6 [117] 3.0 [76] 0.8 [20]

9.59
243.5

6.30
160
BEZEL
158.8
6.25

B
A
8.58
217.8
10.10
256.6

1.67
42.4
C
BEZEL

ALIGNMENT DIMPLES
1.65
41.9

0.65
16.5

0.77
19.6

1.73
43.8
0.194 0.324-100
0.45
11.3

REF .1380-32 FLAT HEAD SCREW


0.44 6.99 TYP. 6 PLCS
11.1 177.4

Figure A-7 Dimensions Standard Kit, GTX 3X5 Transponder, Panel Mounted

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page A-10
Table A-4 Part Numbers [Remote Unit]
Standard Kit Description Unit Install Rack Backplate Connector Kit
010-01215-01 GTX 335 Remote 011-03301-00
115-01771-01 011-02976-00 011-02977-00
010-01217-01 GTX 345 Remote 011-03303-00
010-01215-41 GTX 335 Remote GPS 011-03301-40
115-01771-01 011-02976-01 011-02977-01
010-01217-41 GTX 345 Remote GPS 011-03303-40

2
1

2 GAE ALTITUDE ENCODER


INSTALLATION

3 REF. 211-60234-08 SCREW, PAN HEAD 0.1120-40 UNC-2A


PART OF ITEM 10

VENT

10
1
GTX 3X5 REMOTE TRANSPONDER UNIT
PART OF ITEM 2
11
1

3 REF. 211-60234-08 SCREW, PAN HEAD 0.1120-40 UNC-2A


PART OF BACKPLATE ASSEMBLY

3 REF. 211-63234-08 SCREW, FLAT HEAD 0.1120-40 UNC-2A


PART OF CONNECTOR KIT

REF. 115-01771-01 INSTALL RACK


PART OF ITEM 2

CONNECTOR KIT BACKPLATE ASSEMBLY

PART OF ITEM 2 PART OF ITEM 2

NOTES:
1 BALLOON NUMBERS REFER TO TABLE A-1.

2 INSTALLATION OF GAE ALTITUDE ENCODER IS OPTIONAL.

3 TORQUE .1120-40 UNC-2A (NO. 4) FASTENERS 6-8 IN-LBS.


Figure A-8 Standard Kit, GTX 3X5 Remote Transponder Horizontal Mount

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page A-11
Table A-5 Weight and Center of Gravity
Remote Unit with Standard Rack
Weight Dimensions in [mm]
Standard Kit
lbs [kg] A B C
010-01215-01 2.5 [1.13] 4.8 [120] 3.3 [84] 0.8 [20]
010-01215-41 2.7 [1.22] 4.9 [124] 3.2 [81] 0.8 [20]
010-01217-01 2.9 [1.32] 5.0 [127] 3.0 [76] 0.8 [20]
010-01217-41 3.0 [1.36] 5.0 [127] 3.1 [79] 0.8 [20]

0.57 9.59
14.5 243.5

6.30
160
B
A
10.08
256

C
0.65
16.5

0.82
20.8

1.73
43.8
1.69
43

0.49
12.5

0.194 0.324-100
REF .1380-32 FLAT HEAD SCREW
0.44 6.99 TYP. 6 PLCS
11.1 177.4

Figure A-9 Dimensions Standard Kit, GTX 3X5 Remote Transponder, Horizontal Mount

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page A-12
Table A-6 Part Numbers [Remote Unit, Vertical Mount]
Standard Kit Description Unit Install Rack Backplate Connector Kit
010-01215-02 GTX 335 Remote, Vertical Mount 011-03301-00
011-03762-00 011-02976-10 011-02977-00
010-01217-02 GTX 345 Remote, Vertical Mount 011-03303-00
010-01215-42 GTX 335 Remote GPS, Vertical Mount 011-03301-40
011-03762-00 011-02976-11 011-02977-01
010-01217-42 GTX 345 Remote GPS, Vertical Mount 011-03303-40

3
1

3 REF. 211-63234-08 SCREW, FLAT HEAD 0.1120-40 UNC-2A


PART OF CONNECTOR KIT

BACKPLATE ASSEMBLY
PART OF ITEM 3

REF. 212-00018-04 WASHER, SPLIT


PART OF BACKPLATE ASSEMBLY

4 REF. 211-00290-00 SCREW, SOCKET HEAD 0.1640-32 UNC-2A


GTX 3X5 REMOTE PART OF BACKPLATE ASSEMBLY
TRANSPONDER UNIT
PART OF ITEM 3
2 GAE ALTITUDE ENCODER
INSTALLATION
3 REF. 211-60234-08 SCREW, PAN HEAD 0.1120-40 UNC-2A
PART OF ITEM 10

REF. 011-03762-20
SHOE KIT, VERTICAL MOUNT GTX 3X5
PART OF 011-03762-00

10
1
GTX 3X5 INSTALL RACK
VERTICAL MOUNT
PART OF ITEM 3 11
1

CONNECTOR KIT
REF. 011-03762-10
BASE KIT, VERTICAL MOUNT GTX 3X5 PART OF ITEM 3
PART OF 011-03762-00

4 REF. 211-00245-02 SCREW, WASHER HEAR 0.1640-32 UNC-2A


PART OF 011-03762-20

NOTES:
1 BALLOON NUMBERS REFER TO TABLE A-1.
2 INSTALLATION OF GAE ALTITUDE ENCODER IS OPTIONAL.

3 TORQUE .1120-40 UNC-2A (NO. 4) FASTENERS 6-8 IN-LBS.

4 TORQUE .1680-32 UNC-2A (NO. 8) FASTENERS 12-15 IN-LBS.

Figure A-10 Standard Kit, GTX 3X5 Remote Transponder Vertical Mount

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page A-13
Table A-7 Weight and Center of Gravity
Remote Unit with Vertical Mount
Weight Dimensions in [mm]
Standard Kit
lbs [kg] A B C
010-01215-02 3.0 [1.35] 5.5 [140] 2.7 [69] 1.0 [25]
010-01215-42 3.1 [1.42] 5.5 [140] 2.8 [71] 0.9 [23]
010-01217-02 3.3 [1.51] 5.6 [142] 2.7 [69] 0.9 [23]
010-01217-42 3.5 [1.57] 5.6 [142] 2.7 [69] 0.9 [23]

12.53
318.2

169.7
6.68
B
A
11.42
290.1

C 0.201
TYP. 6 PLCS

0.88
22.2
1.81
45.8

4.00 1.03

0.46
11.7
101.6 26.1
8.00
203.2

Figure A-11 Dimensions Standard Kit, GTX 3X5 Remote Transponder, Vertical Mount

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page A-14
APPENDIX B INTERCONNECT DRAWINGS
Figure B-1 GTX 3X5 - Power, Ground, and Configuration Module Interconnect ............................. B-3
Figure B-2 GTX 3X5 Switches ........................................................................................................... B-5
Figure B-3 GTX 335 - GNS 400W/500W Series Interconnect .......................................................... B-6
Figure B-4 GTX 335 and GTX 345 - Single GNS 400W/500W Series Interconnect ........................ B-7
Figure B-5 GTX 345 - GNS 400W/500W Series Interconnect .......................................................... B-8
Figure B-6 GTX 335 - GTN 6XX/7XX Interconnect ....................................................................... B-10
Figure B-7 Single/Dual GTX 335 - Single GTN 6XX/7XX Interconnect ........................................ B-11
Figure B-8 GTX 345 - GTN 6XX/7XX Interconnect ....................................................................... B-12
Figure B-9 GTX 345 - Single/Dual GTN 6XX/7XX Interconnect ................................................... B-14
Figure B-10 GTX 345 and GTX 335 - Single GTN 6XX/7XX .......................................................... B-16
Figure B-11 GTX 335 - GDU 620 TIS-A Display Interconnect ........................................................ B-17
Figure B-12 GTX 345 - GDU 620 Interconnect ................................................................................. B-17
Figure B-13 GTX 3X5 - Altitude Data Source Interconnect .............................................................. B-18
Figure B-14 GTX 3X5 - AHRS Heading Data Source Interconnect .................................................. B-20
Figure B-15 GTX 3X5 - Audio Interconnect ...................................................................................... B-21
Figure B-16 GTX 335/335R - Traffic System Interconnect ............................................................... B-22
Figure B-17 GTX 345/345R - Traffic System Interconnect ............................................................... B-23
Figure B-18 GTX 3X5 - Radio Altimeter Interconnect ...................................................................... B-25
Figure B-19 GTX 3X5 Providing GPS to GTX 3XX Interconnect .................................................... B-26
Figure B-20 External Traffic Annunciator .......................................................................................... B-27

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page B-1
This section contains wiring interconnect information and examples for the connections necessary for the
installation of the GTX 3X5 Series transponders.
GENERAL NOTES
Each figure contained in this section has notes that must be followed. These general notes apply to all of
the figures in this section:
 Unless specified differently, all wires are 24 AWG or larger.
 Power and ground connections are 22 AWG wire for run lengths less than 10 feet. If not, use
18 AWG.
 Use oversize contacts in the connector kit for wire sizes greater than 22 AWG.
 In 14 VDC installations, use two power pins and two ground pins for power and ground
connections.
 In 28 VDC installations, use only one wire for power and ground connections.
 Antennas and associated cabling are shown for reference only.
 In dual GTX transponder installations, each transponder must be grounded separately using
separate ground terminal/stud locations on the aircraft.
 If practical, power and ground wiring must be routed separately for each transponder.
 Route grounds and wire separately to improve safety if there is a wiring or grounding system
failure.
 Designations for ground connections are as follows.
S Shield Block Ground

Airframe Ground
 Shield ground terminations to the connector backshell must be 3.0 inches or less in length.
 Ground terminations of interfaced equipment can vary. Refer to the manufacturer’s installation
manual for information.
 HDSB Ethernet wiring must use 24 AWG aircraft grade category 5 Ethernet cable. Refer to
table 3-6 for approved Ethernet cable part numbers.
 HSDB, RS-232, and ARINC 429 ports shown are suggested port configurations unless specifically
noted. GTX RS-232 Port 4 is not interchangeable with other RS-232 ports.
 Installations can require alternate port configurations and are permitted provided the equipment
interfaces and data formats are available on alternate ports.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page B-2
GTX 3X5
P3251 XPDR
5
AIRCRAFT POWER 21 22 AWG AVIONICS BUS (14-28VDC)
AIRCRAFT POWER 42 22 AWG 3A
GTX 3x5 WITH GPS/SBAS only
3
GPS KEEP ALIVE 60 UNSWTCH BAT BUS (14-28VDC)

LIGHTING BUS HI 19 EXISTING LIGHTING BUS


LIGHTING BUS LO 40 4 5 5VDC, 14VDC, 28VDC, OR 5VAC
AIRCRAFT
AIRCRAFT GND 20 22 AWG GROUND
AIRCRAFT GND 41 22 AWG
2 POWER CONTROL 38
POWER CONFIG 59

6 EXT SUPPRESSION 18 A/C SUPPRESSION BUS


s

CONFIG MODULE PWR 43 RED


CONFIG
CONFIG MODULE GND 23 BLK MODULE or
CONFIG MODULE DATA 22 YEL ALTITUDE
CONFIG MODULE CLOCK 1 WHT ENCODER
1

USB TYPE B
RECEPTACLE
USB VBUS POWER 44 RED VBUS
USB DATA HI 2 GRN D+
USB DATA LO 24 WHT D-
USB GROUND 45 BLK GND
S SHIELD

P325-XPDR
XPDR
XPDR ANTENNA ANTENNA

GTX 3x5 WITH GPS/SBAS only

P325-GPS
GPS/SBAS
GPS ANTENNA ANTENNA

Figure B-1 GTX 3X5 - Power, Ground, and Configuration Module Interconnect
Sheet 1 of 2

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page B-3
NOTES
CONFIG MODULE REQUIRES WIRING HARNESS P/N: 325-00122-00. GAE PRESSURE/CONFIG MODULE
REQUIRES WIRING HARNESS P/N: 325-00421-00. MODULE WIRING HARNESSES ARE NOT
1
INTERCHANGEABLE. WIRE COLOR IN MODULE WIRING HARNESS DESIGNATES FUNCTION. CONNECT
MODULE WIRING HARNESS TO GTX 3X5 ACCORDING TO WIRE COLOR.

GROUND PIN 38 FOR REMOTE POWER ON/OFF OPERATION. REFER TO SECTION 8.1.4 FOR ADDITIONAL
2 INFORMATION.

GPS KEEP ALIVE IS OPTIONAL FOR GTX UNITS WITH INTERNAL GPS INSTALLED. GPS KEEP ALIVE MUST
3 BE CONNECTED TO THE UNSWITCHABLE BATTERY BUS (BUS DIRECTLY CONNECTED TO THE BATTERY).
IF NOT CONNECTED, GPS ACQUISITION MAY TAKE LONGER.

4 REFER TO SECTION 8.1.3 FOR LIGHTING BUS CONNECTIONS.

SINGLE 22 AWG WIRE WITH 3A CIRCUIT BREAKER IS ALLOWED FOR WIRE RUNS LESS THAN 20 FT.
5 SINGLE 20 AWG WIRE WITH 5A CIRCUIT BREAKER IS ALLOWED FOR WIRE RUNS GREATER THAN 20 FT.

I/O PULSES MAY NOT BE COMPATIBLE WITH ALL MODELS OF DME. THE GARMIN GTX SERIES
SUPPRESSION CIRCUIT HAS KNOWN INCOMPATIBILITY WITH BENDIX/KING DME, AND TRANSPONDERS,
6 SUCH AS THE KN, KNS, KT SERIES UNITS SUPPRESSION METHOD. NO CONNECTION OF THE GTX 3X5
SUPPRESSION SHOULD BE MADE TO INCOMPATIBLE SYSTEMS AS DAMAGE TO THE GTX 3X5 MAY
RESULT. IN THIS CASE, LEAVE THE SUPPRESSION PIN OPEN.

Figure B-1 GTX 3X5 - Power, Ground, and Configuration Module Interconnect
Sheet 2 of 2

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page B-4
1
GTX 3X5 P3251
ALRT
ACK

AUDIO CANCEL 37 3

5
TRFC
AUDIO MUTE 15 4 AURAL

COLLECTIVE SWITCH 57 2

IDENT

EXT IDENT 36

XPDR 1 6
EXT STANDBY 14
XPDR
SELECT
XPDR 2

NOTES

1 CERTAIN DISCRETE I/O PINS ARE CONFIGURABLE. REFER TO SECTION 8.1.7.

THE COLLECTIVE SWITCH INPUT CAN BE USED TO CONTROL AIR/GROUND STATUS. REFER TO TABLE 6-9
2 FOR MORE INFORMATION ABOUT THE INPUT SENSE CONFIGURATION.

3 CANCELS THE AURAL ALERT FOR THE ALERTING TRAFFIC. REFER TO SECTION 3.7 FOR PLACARDS.

THE AUDIO MUTE MUST BE WIRED TO THE HIGHER PRIORITY AUDIO ALERT DEVICES SUCH AS TAWS.
4 FOR GTX 335 INSTALLATIONS WITH AN EXTERNAL TAS/TCAS TRAFFIC SYSTEM, CONNECT THIS TO THE
TAS/TCAS AUDIO INHIBIT OUTPUT.

5 REFER TO SECTION 3.7 FOR SWITCH REQUIREMENTS.

EXTERNAL STANDBY SWITCH CANNOT BE CONNECTED WHILE INTERFACED TO THE GTN FOR
6 TRANSPONDER CONTROLS.

Figure B-2 GTX 3X5 Switches

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page B-5
SINGLE GNS 400W/500W SERIES
P4001/
GTX 335 P3251 P5001
GNS 400W/500W
RS-232 #2 RX 30 56 RS232 OUT 1
RS-232 #3 GND 51
s

TIS-A SELECT 15 11 DISCRETE OUT


s
ARINC 429 IN 1A
ARINC 429 OUT A 5 48 ARINC 429 IN 1B
ARINC 429 OUT B 6 49
s

DUAL GNS 400W/500W SERIES


GTX 335 P4001/
P3251 P5001
GNS 400W/500W #1
RS-232 #2 RX 30 56 RS232 OUT 1
RS-232 #3 GND 51
s
ARINC 429 OUT A 5 48 ARINC 429 IN 1A
ARINC 429 OUT B 6 49 ARINC 429 IN 1B
s

1
11 DISCRETE OUT

P4001/
P5001
GNS 400W/500W #2
48 ARINC 429 IN 1A
49 ARINC 429 IN 1B

TIS-A SELECT 15 11 DISCRETE OUT 1


s

RS-232 #2 RX 29 56 RS232 OUT 1


RS-232 #3 GND 50
s

NOTES

1 CONNECTION MUST BE MADE TO BOTH NAVIGATOR #1 AND NAVIGATOR #2.

Figure B-3 GTX 335 - GNS 400W/500W Series Interconnect

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page B-6
GTX 345 and 335 with Single 400W/500W SERIES
P4001/
GTX 345 P3251 P5001
GNS 400W/500W
RS-232 IN 2 30 56 RS232 OUT 1
2 RS-232 OUT 2 8 57 RS232 IN 1
RS-232 GND 2 51
s

ARINC 429 OUT A 5 48 ARINC 429 IN 1A


ARINC 429 OUT B 6 49 ARINC 429 IN 1B
s

P5050
3 AUDIO MUTE 37 15 TAWS AUDIO ACTIVE 1

P4001/
P3251 P5001
GTX 335
RS-232 IN 2 30 58 RS232 OUT 2
2 RS-232 GND 2 51
s

NOTES

1 TAWS AUDIO INHIBIT USED WITH GNS TAWS UNITS ONLY.

2 RS-232 PORTS 1 THROUGH 3 ARE AVAILABLE.

3 ANY AUDIO MUTE CONFIGURABLE DISCRETE CAN BE USED.

Figure B-4 GTX 335 and GTX 345 - Single GNS 400W/500W Series Interconnect

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page B-7
SINGLE GNS 400W/500W SERIES
P4001/
GTX 345 P3251 P5001
GNS 400W/500W
RS-232 IN 2 30 56 RS232 OUT 1
3 RS-232 OUT 2 8 57 RS232 IN 1
RS-232 GND 2 51
s

ARINC 429 OUT A 5 48 ARINC 429 IN 1A


ARINC 429 OUT B 6 49 ARINC 429 IN 1B
s

P5050

4 AUDIO MUTE 37 15 TAWS AUDIO ACTIVE 1

DUAL GNS 400W/500W SERIES


P4001/
GTX 345 P3251 P5001
GNS 400W/500W #1
RS-232 IN 2 30 56 RS232 OUT 1
RS-232 OUT 2 8 57 RS232 IN 1
3 RS-232 GND 2 51
s

ARINC 429 OUT A 5 48 ARINC 429 IN 1A


ARINC 429 OUT B 6 49 ARINC 429 IN 1B
s

P4001/
P5001
GNS 400W/500W #2
48 ARINC 429 IN 1A
49 ARINC 429 IN 1B

RS-232 IN 3 29 56 RS232 OUT 1


3 RS-232 OUT 3 7 57 RS232 IN 1
RS-232 GND 3 50
s

P5050
1
4 AUDIO MUTE 37 15 TAWS AUDIO ACTIVE
2

Figure B-5 GTX 345 - GNS 400W/500W Series Interconnect


Sheet 1 of 2

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page B-8
NOTES

1 TAWS AUDIO INHIBIT REQUIRED FOR EACH GNS UNIT ON WHICH HTAWS IS ENABLED.

2 CONNECTION CAN BE MADE TO NAVIGATOR #1 INSTEAD OF NAVIGATOR #2.

3 RS-232 PORTS 1 THROUGH 3 ARE AVAILABLE.

4 ANY AUDIO MUTE CONFIGURABLE DISCRETE CAN BE USED.

Figure B-5 GTX 345 - GNS 400W/500W Series Interconnect


Sheet 2 of 2

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page B-9
GTX 335 P3251 XPDR
AVIONICS BUS
AIRCRAFT POWER 21 22 AWG
(28VDC or 14 VDC)
AIRCRAFT POWER 42 22 AWG 3A
AIRCRAFT
AIRCRAFT GND 20 22 AWG GROUND
AIRCRAFT GND 41 22 AWG
POWER CONTROL 38
2
POWER CONFIG 59
P1001 GTN 6XX/7XX
RS-232 IN 3 29 8 RS-232 OUT 1
RS-232 OUT 3 7 27 RS-232 IN 1
RS-232 GND 3 50 46 SIGNAL GROUND
S

ALTITUDE
ENCODER
RS-232 IN 1 31 RS-232 OUT HI
RS-232 GND 1 52 RS-232 OUT LO
S

CONFIG MODULE PWR 43 RED CONFIG


CONFIG MODULE GND 23 BLK MODULE
CONFIG MODULE DATA 22 YEL
CONFIG MODULE CLK 1 WHT 1

USB TYPE B
RECEPTACLE
USB VBUS POWER 44 RED VBUS
USB DATA HI 2 GRN D+
USB DATA LO 24 WHT D-
USB GROUND 45 BLK GND
s SHIELD

P325-XPDR
XPDR
XPDR ANT ANTENNA

NOTES
CONFIGURATION MODULE REQUIRES WIRE HARNESS P/N: 325-00122-00. GAE PRESSURE/CONFIG
MODULE REQUIRES WIRE HARNESS P/N: 325-00421-00. MODULE WIRE HARNESSES ARE NOT
1
INTERCHANGEABLE. WIRE COLOR IN MODULE WIRE HARNESS DESIGNATES FUNCTION. CONNECT
MODULE WIRE HARNESS TO GTX 3X5 ACCORDING TO WIRE COLOR.

2 REFER TO SECTION 8.1.4 FOR DETAILS.

Figure B-6 GTX 335 - GTN 6XX/7XX Interconnect

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page B-10
GTX 335 #1 P3251 P1001 GTN 6XX/7XX

RS-232 IN 3 29 8 RS-232 OUT 1


RS-232 OUT 3 7 27 RS-232 IN 1
RS-232 GND 3 50 46 SIGNAL GROUND
s s

GTX 335 #2 P3251

RS-232 IN 3 29 7 RS-232 OUT 2


RS-232 OUT 3 7 26 RS-232 IN 2
RS-232 GND 3 50 45 RS-232 GND 2
s s

NOTES
DASHED AREAS INDICATE MORE INTERCONNECTS FOR DUAL INSTALLATION AND ARE NOT REQUIRED
1
FOR SINGLE INSTALLATION.

Figure B-7 Single/Dual GTX 335 - Single GTN 6XX/7XX Interconnect

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page B-11
GTX 345 P3252 P1002 GTN 6XX/7XX
ETHERNET IN 1A 7 25 ETHERNET OUT 3A
ETHERNET IN 1B 2 26 ETHERNET OUT 3B
ETHERNET OUT 1A 6 23 ETHERNET IN 3A
ETHERNET OUT 1B 1 24 ETHERNET IN 3B
s s
P3251
RS-232 IN 3 29 8 RS-232 OUT 1
3 RS-232 OUT 3 7 27 RS-232 IN 1
RS-232 GND 3 50 46 SIGNAL GROUND
s s

4 AUDIO MUTE 37 35 TAWS AUDIO ACTIVE


AIRCRAFT P1001
AIRCRAFT GND 20 22 AWG GROUND
AIRCRAFT GND 41 22 AWG
POWER CONTROL 38
2 POWER CONFIG 59
XPDR

AVIONICS BUS
AIRCRAFT POWER 21 22 AWG
(28VDC or 14 VDC)
AIRCRAFT POWER 42 22 AWG 3A

5 EXT SUPPRESSION 18 A/C SUPPRESSION BUS

AUDIO PANEL
AUDIO OUT HI 46 AUDIO IN HI
AUDIO OUT LO 47 AUDIO IN LO
s

ALTITUDE
ENCODER
RS-232 IN 1 31 RS-232 OUT HI
RS-232 GND 1 52 RS-232 OUT LO
s

CONFIG MODULE PWR 43 RED CONFIG


CONFIG MODULE GND 23 BLK MODULE
CONFIG MODULE DATA 22 YEL
CONFIG MODULE CLK 1 WHT 1

USB TYPE B
RECEPTACLE
USB VBUS POWER 44 RED VBUS
USB DATA HI 2 GRN D+
USB DATA LO 24 WHT D-
USB GROUND 45 BLK GND
s SHIELD

P325-XPDR XPDR
XPDR ANT ANTENNA

Figure B-8 GTX 345 - GTN 6XX/7XX Interconnect


Sheet 1 of 2

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page B-12
NOTES
CONFIG MODULE REQUIRES WIRE HARNESS P/N: 325-00122-00. GAE PRESSURE/CONFIG MODULE
REQUIRES WIRE HARNESS P/N: 325-00421-00. MODULE WIRE HARNESSES ARE NOT INTERCHANGEABLE.
1
WIRE COLOR IN MODULE WIRE HARNESS DESIGNATES FUNCTION. CONNECT MODULE WIRE HARNESS
TO GTX 3X5 ACCORDING TO WIRE COLOR.

2 REFER TO SECTION 8.1.4 FOR DETAILS.

3 RS-232 PORTS 1 THROUGH 3 AVAILABLE.

4 ANY AUDIO MUTE CONFIGURABLE DISCRETE CAN BE USED.

I/O PULSES MAY NOT BE COMPATIBLE WITH ALL MODELS OF DME. THE GARMIN GTX SERIES
SUPPRESSION CIRCUIT HAS KNOWN INCOMPATIBILITY WITH BENDIX/KING DME, AND TRANSPONDERS,
5 SUCH AS THE KN, KNS, KT SERIES UNITS SUPPRESSION METHOD. NO CONNECTION OF THE GTX 3X5
SUPPRESSION SHOULD BE MADE TO INCOMPATIBLE SYSTEMS AS DAMAGE TO THE GTX 3X5 MAY
RESULT. IN THIS CASE, LEAVE THE SUPPRESSION PIN OPEN.

Figure B-8 GTX 345 - GTN 6XX/7XX Interconnect


Sheet 2 of 2

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page B-13
SINGLE GTX 345 or GTX 345R with SINGLE GTN 6XX/7XX

GTX 345 P3252 P1002 GTN 6XX/7XX


ETHERNET IN 1A 7 25 ETHERNET OUT 3A
ETHERNET IN 1B 2 26 ETHERNET OUT 3B
ETHERNET OUT 1A 6 23 ETHERNET IN 3A
ETHERNET OUT 1B 1 24 ETHERNET IN 3B
s s

RS-232 IN 3 29 8 RS-232 OUT 1


3 RS-232 OUT 3 7 27 RS-232 IN 1
RS-232 GND 3 50 46 SIGNAL GROUND
s s

4 GTN TAWS UNITS ONLY 2


AUDIO MUTE 37 35 TAWS AUDIO ACTIVE
P3251 P1001

SINGLE GTX 345 or GTX 345R with DUAL GTN 6XX/7XXs

GTX 345 P3252 P1002 GTN 6XX/7XX #1


ETHERNET IN 1A 7 25 ETHERNET OUT 3A
ETHERNET IN 1B 2 26 ETHERNET OUT 3B
ETHERNET OUT 1A 6 23 ETHERNET IN 3A
ETHERNET OUT 1B 1 24 ETHERNET IN 3B
s s P1001
P3251
RS-232 IN 3 29 8 RS-232 OUT 1
3 RS-232 OUT 3 7 27 RS-232 IN 1
RS-232 GND 3 50 46 SIGNAL GROUND
s s

GTN TAWS UNITS ONLY


4 AUDIO MUTE 37 35 TAWS AUDIO ACTIVE 2

8 ETHERNET OUT 1A
9 ETHERNET OUT 1B
6 ETHERNET IN 1A
7 ETHERNET IN 1B
s

P1002 GTN 6XX/7XX #2


9 ETHERNET OUT 1B
8 ETHERNET OUT 1A
7 ETHERNET IN 1B
6 ETHERNET IN 1A
s
GTN TAWS UNITS ONLY
35 TAWS AUDIO ACTIVE 2
10 SYSTEM ID 1
s

Figure B-9 GTX 345 - Single/Dual GTN 6XX/7XX Interconnect


Sheet 1 of 2

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page B-14
NOTES
WHEN GTN 6XX/7XX IS THE ONLY INSTALLED GPS NAVIGATOR, OR GPS NAVIGATOR #1 IN A DUAL GPS
NAVIGATOR INSTALLATION, CONFIGURE GTN 6XX/7XX AS GTN #1 BY LEAVING SYSTEM ID (P1002-10) NOT
1
CONNECTED. WHEN THE GTN 6XX/7XX IS GPS NAVIGATOR #2 IN A DUAL GPS INSTALLATION, CONFIGURE
GTN #2 BY GROUNDING SYSTEM ID (P1002-10) TO THE SHIELD BLOCK.

2 TAWS AUDIO INHIBIT REQUIRED FOR EACH GTN 6XX/7XX UNIT ON WHICH HTAWS IS ENABLED.

3 RS-232 PORTS 1 THROUGH 3 AVAILABLE.

4 ANY AUDIO MUTE CONFIGURABLE DISCRETE CAN BE USED.

Figure B-9 GTX 345 - Single/Dual GTN 6XX/7XX Interconnect


Sheet 2 of 2

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page B-15
GTX 345 and 335 with GTN
GTX 345 P3252 P1002
GTN 6XX/7XX
ETHERNET IN 1A 7 25 ETHERNET OUT 3A
ETHERNET IN 1B 2 26 ETHERNET OUT 3B
ETHERNET OUT 1A 6 23 ETHERNET IN 3A
ETHERNET OUT 1B 1 24 ETHERNET IN 3B
s s
P3251 P1001
RS-232 IN 3 29 8 RS-232 OUT 1
1 RS-232 OUT 3 7 27 RS-232 IN 1
RS-232 GND 3 50 46 SIGNAL GROUND
s s

2 AUDIO MUTE 37 7 RS-232 OUT 2


26 RS-232 IN 2
45 RS-232 GND 2
s

GTX 335 P3251

RS-232 IN 3 29
RS-232 OUT 3 7
1 RS-232 GND 3 50
s
35 TAWS AUDIO ACTIVE

NOTES

1 RS-232 PORTS 1 THROUGH 3 AVAILABLE.

2 ANY AUDIO MUTE CONFIGURABLE DISCRETE CAN BE USED.

Figure B-10 GTX 345 and GTX 335 - Single GTN 6XX/7XX

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page B-16
GTX 335 with GDU 620

GTX 335 P3251 P6201


GDU 620 #1
  TIS-A SELECT 15 26 TIS/TAS STANDBY*   1
1
P6203
ARINC 429 OUT A 5 4 ARINC 429 IN 7A
ARINC 429 OUT B 6 26 ARINC 429 IN 7B
s
S

GDU 620 #2
P6201
26 TIS/TAS STANDBY*   1

P6203
4 ARINC 429 IN 7A
26 ARINC 429 IN 7B
s

NOTES

1 CONFIGURABLE I/O DISCRETE.

Figure B-11 GTX 335 - GDU 620 TIS-A Display Interconnect

GTX 345 with GDU 620


GTX 345 P3252 P6201
GDU 620
1
ETHERNET IN 1A 7 32 ETHERNET OUT 2A
ETHERNET IN 1B 2 33 ETHERNET OUT 2B
2 ETHERNET OUT 1A 6 30 ETHERNET IN 2A 2
ETHERNET OUT 1B 1 31 ETHERNET IN 2B
s s

NOTES
IF A GTN 6XX/7XX OR GDL 69AH IS INSTALLED THAT PROVIDES A PATH FROM THE GTX TO THE GDU 620,
A DIRECT CONNECTION IS NOT REQUIRED. REFER TO GTN 6XX/7XX PART 27 AML STC INSTALLATION
1
MANUAL AND G500H ROTORCRAFT STC INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL HSDB INTERCONNECT
OPTIONS.

ANY AVAILABLE ETHERNET PORT MAY BE USED. REFER TO APPENDIX C FOR CONFIGURATION
2
SETTINGS.

Figure B-12 GTX 345 - GDU 620 Interconnect

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page B-17
E N C O D IN G
A L T IM E T E R
S A N D IA
S A E 5-35 (G R A Y C O D E )
G TX 3X 5
P 3251
A LT IT U D E D 4 13 1 A LT IT U D E D 4
A LT IT U D E A 1 10 2 A LT IT U D E A 1
A LT IT U D E A 2 32 3 A LT IT U D E A 2
A LT IT U D E A 4 53 4 A LT IT U D E A 4
A LT IT U D E B 1 11 5 A LT IT U D E B 1
A LT IT U D E B 2 33 9 A LT IT U D E B 2
A LT IT U D E B 4 54 10 A LT IT U D E B 4
A LT IT U D E C 1 12 11 A LT IT U D E C 1
A LT IT U D E C 2 34 13 A LT IT U D E C 2
A LT IT U D E C 4 55 12 A LT IT U D E C 4
A LT . G R O U N D 56 6 A LT . C O M M O N
  SW . PW R. OUT 39 14 POW ER
5   15 GROUND
1

C O N F IG M O D U LE P W R 43
G A R M IN
RED
C O N F IG M O D U LE G N D 23 B LK
A L TIT U D E
C O N F IG M O D U LE D A T A 22 YEL ENCODER
C O N F IG M O D U LE C LO C K 1 WHT
   
A L T IT U D E
7 3 ENCODER
  ACK IC A R U S S A N D IA S H A D IN S H A D IN T R A N S -C A L (R S -232)
9 Te chno logies Instrum ents S A E 5-35 8800T F /A D C -200 IA -R S 232-X
A -30 3000 F /A D C -2000 S S D -120
D B 15 P 3 (D B 9) J5 D B 15 J2 D B 9 D A -15S
 
6 R S -232 2 IN 30 7 (14) 2 1 (2) 7 6 4 (9) 4 (12) R S -232 O U T H I
R S -232 2 G N D 51 S H E LL S H E LL 6 15 9 5 5 R S -232 G N D
1 1
s   2 2 C O N F IG .
4
7 7 JU M P E R S
  8 8
2
 
7
A IR D A T A
B & D G A R M IN G A R M IN B endix/K ing B endix/K ing S H A D IN S H A D IN
COM PUTER
(S P IR E N T ) G D C 74() G D U 620 H O N E Y W E LL H O N E Y W E LL F/A D C 2000 F/A D C 2000
90004 -003 K D C 281 K D C 481 962830 A -() 962830-() (A R IN C 42 9)

P 741 P 6203 P 2811 P 4811 J1 (M S -55) J2 (D B 15)


  A 429 IN 1A 27 27 29 2 5 U 40 7 A 429 T X A
8 A 429 IN 1B 28 9 30 24 6 i 22 8 A 429 T X B
s

Figure B-13 GTX 3X5 - Altitude Data Source Interconnect


Sheet 1 of 2

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page B-18
NOTES

1 USE 1N4007 DIODE FOR ENCODER POWER.

2 TO GTX #2 IF INSTALLED. RS-232 SPLICE MUST BE MADE ADJACENT TO GTX #1 CONNECTOR AS SHOWN.

CONFIGURE ENCODER OUTPUT TO “TRIMBLE/GARMIN 9600 BPS” FORMAT IF USING RS-232 SOFTWARE
3
METHOD.

PN 2 CAN BE LEFT OPEN IF 100’ RESOLUTION IS DESIRED (DEFAULT). LIMIT STRAP LENGTH TO
4
SPECIFIED LENGTH IN THE MANUFACTURERS INSTALLATION MANUAL.

5 POWERING SAE 5-35 THROUGH THE SWITCHED OUTPUT IS OPTIONAL.

6 RS-232 PORTS 1 THROUGH 3 ARE AVAILABLE.

7 FOR THE SHADIN, ONLY 1 INPUT IS NECESSARY (I.E., RS-232 OR ARINC 429, BUT NOT BOTH).

8 ARINC IN 2 CAN BE USED INSTEAD OF ARINC IN 1.

9 MOD 8 OR HIGHER.

Figure B-13 GTX 3X5 - Altitude Data Source Interconnect


Sheet 2 of 2

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page B-19
HEADING
GARMIN GARMIN GARMIN GARMIN
SOURCE
GTX 3X5 GRS 77 GAD 42 GDU 620 GNS 4XX/5XX
(ARINC 429)
P3251  
P771 P421 P6203 P4001/P5001 1
  A429 IN 1A 27 12 13 2 46 A429 TX A
2 A429 IN 1B 28 27 14 24 47 A429 TX B
s s

HEADING
ASPEN AVIDYNE COLLINS HONEYWELL SANDEL SANDEL SOURCE
GTX 3X5 EFD1000 EXP5000 AHC-85E EFIS 40/50 SN3500 SN3308 (ARINC 429)
700-00006-() (SG 465)
P3251  
P1 P732 P1 P4652B P2 P3 1

  A429 IN 1A 27 26 22 16 47 30 11 A429 TX A
2 A429 IN 1B 28 27 21 14 20 15 29 A429 TX B
s

NOTES

1 SUPPORTED EQUIPMENT SHOWN CONNECTED IN PARALLEL.

2 ARINC IN 2 CAN BE USED INSTEAD OF ARINC IN 1.

Figure B-14 GTX 3X5 - AHRS Heading Data Source Interconnect

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page B-20
GTX 3X5 GARMIN
AUDIO
PANEL
SL 10/15 GMA 35/
SERIES
GMA 340 GMA 347
35C/350
GMA 1347 (ANALOG)
P3251   3 BOTTOM J1 P3471 P3501 P3501  
2
AUDIO OUT HI 46 T 31 19 31 19 AUDIO IN [HI]
AUDIO OUT LO 47 GND LUG 32 39 32 39 AUDIO IN [LO]

  EXTERNAL AUDIO INHIBIT DISCRETE (GND) – CONNECT TO HIGH PRIORITY


4 AUDIO MUTE 37
DEVICES (TAWS, ETC.)

AUDIO
BENDIX/KING PS ENGINEERING PANEL
GTX 3X5
(ANALOG)
KMA 24H PMA 6000
KMA 24 KMA 26 KMA 28 PMA 8000
-70/-71 PMA 7000
P3251   3 P241 P241 P261 J1(Bottom) J1 (Bottom) BOTTOM  
2
AUDIO OUT HI 46 T 10 14 T 31 T AUDIO IN [HI]
AUDIO OUT LO 47 GND LUG GND LUG 31 GND LUG 32 GND LUG AUDIO IN [LO]

EXTERNAL AUDIO INHIBIT DISCRETE (GND) – CONNECT TO HIGH PRIORITY


4 AUDIO MUTE 37
 
DEVICES (TAWS, ETC.)

AUDIO
TECHI-
GTX 3X5 SONICS BECKER NAT PANEL
(ANALOG)
A710 AMS
DVCS 6100 AMS 50
A711 42/44
 
P3251 3 J201 REU6100 P1 J102 P101  
2
AUDIO OUT HI 46 3 36 13 10 AUDIO IN [HI]
AUDIO OUT LO 47 22 37 32 L AUDIO IN [LO]

EXTERNAL AUDIO INHIBIT DISCRETE (GND) – CONNECT TO HIGH PRIORITY


4 AUDIO MUTE 37
 
DEVICES (TAWS, ETC.)

 
MIXING AUDIO SIGNALS USING RESISTORS 2

BEFORE MODIFICATION AFTER MODIFICATION

EXISTING LRU AUDIO PANEL EXISTING LRU R AUDIO PANEL

AUDIO OUT HI UNSWITCHED AUDIO OUT HI UNSWITCHED


LO AUDIO IN LO AUDIO IN
R
GTX 3X5  
3
AUDIO OUT

NOTES
REFER TO THE GENERAL NOTES AT THE BEGINNING OF THIS APPENDIX FOR MORE INFORMATION AND
1
REQUIREMENTS.

IT IS PERMITTED TO USE OTHER AVAILABLE UNSWITCHED, UNMUTED INPUTS. IF AUDIO PANEL DOES
NOT HAVE AN AVAILABLE UNSWITCHED, UNMUTED INPUT, AUDIO FROM THE GTX 3X5 MUST BE MIXED
2 WITH AN EXISTING AUDIO SOURCE USING RESISTORS TO ISOLATE THE AUDIO OUTPUT FROM EACH LRU.
A TYPICAL VALUE FOR MIXING RESISTORS IS 390Ω ¼ W. THE AUDIO LEVELS OF EXISTING AUDIO
SOURCES WILL HAVE TO BE RE-EVALUATED AFTER MIXING RESISTORS ARE INSTALLED.

SHIELDS FOR AUDIO CABLES MUST BE GROUNDED AT ONE END (WITH LEADS LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES)
3
AND LEFT FLOATING AT THE OTHER END.

4 ANY AUDIO MUTE CONFIGURABLE DISCRETE CAN BE USED.

Figure B-15 GTX 3X5 - Audio Interconnect

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page B-21
GTX 335 Garmin GTS
P8001 8XX
P3251
A429 OUT 1A 5 25 A429 RX A
A429 OUT 1B 6 26 A429 RX B 1
s s

NOTES
THE GTS CONFIGURES AN INPUT/OUTPUT FORMAT FOR THE GTX 335. THE GTX 335 DOES NOT RECEIVE
1 THE DATA FROM THE GTS. THE ARINC 429 FROM THE GTS MUST BE CONFIGURED FOR AN UNUSED
PORT.
Figure B-16 GTX 335/335R - Traffic System Interconnect

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page B-22
TRAFFIC
L3 COMM GARMIN SENSOR
SKY 899 SKY 497 GTS 8XX (ARINC 429)
GTX 345
8
P3251 P1 P1 P8001 P8002
A429 IN 1A 27 42 34 23 -- A429 TX A
A429 IN 1B 28 43 33 24 -- A429 TX B
s
A429 OUT 1A 5 -- -- 25 -- A429 RX A
A429 OUT 1B 6 -- -- 26 -- A429 RX B
s
EXTERNAL
18 93 89 -- 48 EXTERNAL
SUPPRESSION
s SUPPRESSION
TRFC TEST 15 19 85 -- 74 TEST MODE
4
TRFC STBY 16 21 82 -- 75 STBY/OPERATE

89 (90) 92 (91) 58 AUDIO HI


6 NC 91 90 59 AUDIO LO
3 3
24 88 -- -- SQUAT SWITCH
(COLLECTIVE
POSITION)

TRAFFIC
AVIDYNE SENSOR
TAS600 (RS-232)
GTX 345 RYAN 9900BX
8
P3251 P1
EXTERNAL EXTERNAL
18 7
SUPPRESSION SUPPRESSION
s
3 AUDIO HI
6 NC 4 AUDIO LO
P3252
5 RS-232 #4 RX 10 20 RS-232 #3 TX
RS-232 #4 TX 5 22 RS-232 #3 RX
RS-232 #4 GND 15 21 RS-232 #3 GND
s

2 J1
COLLECTIVE 7
TCAD SL (SENSE) 14 11
POSITION

Figure B-17 GTX 345/345R - Traffic System Interconnect


Sheet 1 of 2

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page B-23
NOTES

1 NOT USED

2 IF THIS DISCRETE IS ALREADY USED, ANY CONFIGURABLE OUTPUT DISCRETE CAN BE USED INSTEAD.

CONFIGURE THE TRC 497/899 “COLLECTIVE POSITION” SWITCH AS “ACTIVE LOW.” REFER TO
3 MANUFACTURER’S DOCUMENTATION FOR COMPLETE CONFIGURATION INFORMATION.

4 CONFIGURABLE FOR P3251 ONLY.

5 NON-CONFIGURABLE PORT. ONLY RS-232 PORT 4 CAN BE USED FOR THIS CONNECTION.

IF THE EXTERNAL TRAFFIC SENSOR WAS INTERFACED TO THE AUDIO PANEL, THESE WIRES MUST BE
6 CAPPED AND STOWED AND ONLY THE GTX 345 MUST BE INTERFACED TO THE AUDIO PANEL.

7 THIS DISCRETE IS TO DRIVE THE SENSITIVITY LEVEL FOR THE TRAFFIC SYSTEM.

8 REFER TO AUDIO PANEL INTERFACE FOR DETAILS.

Figure B-17 GTX 345/345R - Traffic System Interconnect


Sheet 2 of 2

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page B-24
GTX 3X5 RADIO
HONEYWELL GARMIN FREE FLIGHT
KRA 405B GRA 55/5500 RA-4500
ALTIMETER
(ARINC 429)
P3251 P1 J5501 P1
A429 IN 1A 27 B 52 12 A429 TX A
A429 IN 1B 28 C 55  
1 11 A429 TX B
s

NOTES

1 ONLY APPLICABLE TO FREE FLIGHT RA-4500 P/N 84560-X2-XXXX.

Figure B-18 GTX 3X5 - Radio Altimeter Interconnect

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page B-25
GTX 3X5 GARMIN GTX 3XX
GTX 3X5 GTX 33X ES

P3251 P3251 P3301 1


RS-232 OUT 1 9 30 24 RS-232 IN 2
1 RS-232 GND 1 52 51 58 RS-232 GND 2
s s

GTX 3X5 WITH GPS/SBAS only

P325-GPS
GPS/SBAS
GPS ANTENNA ANTENNA

NOTE

1 FOR GTX 3X5 UNITS, RS-232 PORTS 1 THROUGH 3 ARE AVAILABLE.

Figure B-19 GTX 3X5 Providing GPS to GTX 3XX Interconnect

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page B-26
TRAFFIC ANNUNCIATOR 3
TEST
GTX 345 P3251 B
4 C T G
1 TRAFFIC ALERT 15 D A

18-200

LAMP VOLTAGE FROM


2
ANNUNCIATOR DIMMER
CIRCUIT

NOTES

1 CONFIGURABLE I/O DISCRETE.

USE APPLIED AVIONICS VIVISUN ANNUNCIATOR LED-40-17-HA1-E1G30 OR AN EXISTING CAUTION/


2 WARNING LIGHT IN EXISTING ANNUNCIATOR PANEL. MUST BE LABELED “TRAFFIC” AND BE AMBER IN
COLOR.

3 ANNUNCIATOR IS REQUIRED WHEN THERE IS NO DISPLAY FOR TRAFFIC INSTALLATION.

4 CONNECT TO EXISTING ANNUNCIATOR TEST CIRCUIT. GROUND TO ACTIVATE.

Figure B-20 External Traffic Annunciator

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page B-27
APPENDIX C EQUIPMENT COMPATIBILITY AND CONFIGURATION
C.1 Remote Control................................................................................................................................ C-2
C.2 GPS Source ...................................................................................................................................... C-2
C.3 Altitude Source ................................................................................................................................ C-3
C.4 Radar Altimeters .............................................................................................................................. C-6
C.5 Heading Source................................................................................................................................ C-7
C.6 Audio Panels .................................................................................................................................... C-9
C.7 Traffic and Weather Display.......................................................................................................... C-10
C.8 Traffic Sensors (GTX 345 Only) ................................................................................................... C-12
C.9 Bluetooth........................................................................................................................................ C-12
The equipment listed in this section is compatible with the GTX 3X5 series ADS-B transponders.
Hardware that is not applicable to the GTX 3X5 is marked with N/A in the Configuration Setting.

Table C-1 Interface Summary

Minimum Software
GTX Unit Interfaced LRU Primary Functions
Needed
• Transponder Remote Control
• Traffic and Weather Display
GTN 6XX/7XX v6.11 • ADS-B GPS Position Source
• HSDB Pass-through for GTX 345
• Height Above Terrain Source
• Traffic and Weather Display
G500H (GDU 620) v7.11 • HSDB Pass-through for GTX 345
GTX 3X5 • Height Above Terrain Source

• Traffic and Weather Display


GNS 400W/500W v5.30 • ADS-B GPS Position Source
• Height Above Terrain Source
Main: v2.05 • ADS-B GPS Position Source
GTX 3X5 with GPS
ADS-B: v2.05

GDL 69AH (SXM) v5.10 • HSDB Pass-through for GTX 345

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page C-1
C.1 Remote Control
Table C-2 Remote Control

Manufacturer Model Data Format Interface Config GTX 335 Config GTX 345 Config Notes
Installations with no
GTX Mode S+ REMOTE FMT 1 REMOTE FMT 1
Garmin GTN 6XX/7XX RS-232 TIS.

GTX w/TIS+ REMOTE FMT 2 N/A Installations with TIS.

C.2 GPS Source


GTX transponders configured for remote control can receive GPS position source data from the remote interface.
Table C-3 GPS Source

Manufacturer Model Data Format Interface Config GTX 3X5 Config Notes
Refer to section 6.1.5 for
Internal N/A N/A
information.
RS-232 ADS-B OUT + ADS-B + FMT 1 [1]
GTN 6XX/7XX Applicable to GTX 345
HSDB ADS-B In Source: GTX GTN - Enabled [2]
installations only.
Garmin ADSB TFC Applicable to GTX 345
GNS [3]
GNS 400W/500W RS-232 ADSB TFC WX installations only.

ADS-B OUT + ADS-B + FMT 1 Supports GPS data only.

ADS-B + FMT 1 N/A


GTX 3X5 RS-232
ADS-B + FMT 2 ADS-B + FMT 2

[1] This GTX format only accepts ADS-B Out Compliant GPS data. The GTN will also provide ADS-B Out Compliant GPS data when configured as a
remote control source for the GTX. Refer to table C-2 for more information.
[2] To receive ADS-B Out GPS data from the GTN via HSDB the GPS Source must be configured to GTN #1 (or #2). Refer to section 6.1.5 for more
details.
[3] The primary purpose of this interface is for ADS-B In data, however this format also includes ADS-B Out GPS data. Refer to table C-8 for more
information.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page C-2
C.3 Altitude Source
Air data computers not listed below can still be approved under this STC if all of the following conditions are met.
1. The air data computer provides the following ARINC 429 labels:
a. 203 - Pressure Altitude
b. 204 - Barometric-Corrected Altitude
c. 210 - True Airspeed
2. The interface check for the altitude encoder described in section 7 must be successfully completed.
3. The installation of the air data computer was previously FAA-approved.
4. The air data computer is TSO approved.
5. The connections to the GTX must utilize shielded wiring of the type specified in this manual. Shields must be terminated on the GTX side to the connector
shield block ground and on the air data computer side in accordance with the air data computer installation data. If the air data computer installation data
does not specify a shielding method, then terminate the shield at the air data computer using the guidelines provided in section 4.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page C-3
Table C-4 Altitude Sources

Interfacing Equipment GTX 3X5 Configuration


Manufacturer Model Data Format Notes
Configuration Setting
ADC
GDC 74( ) ARINC 429 N/A
(Speed: LOW)

GENERAL PURPOSE 1 EFIS AIR DATA This interface also provides heading data.
ARINC 429
(Speed: HIGH) (Speed: HIGH) Refer to table C-6 for more information.

Applicable to GTX 345 installations only.


GDU 620 This configuration can also provide
Traffic/ADS-B - Present
HSDB [3] GDU - Enabled [5] heading and radio altimeter data, in
Type: GTX ADS-B [4]
addition to altitude. Refer to table C-5 and
table C-6 for more information.
This configuration is primarily for purposes
GTX Mode S+ [1] REMOTE FMT 1 [1] of transponder remote control. However
Garmin RS-232 (or) (or) this configuration also provides altitude
GTX w/TIS+ [2] REMOTE FMT 2 [2] data. Refer to table C-2 for more
information.

GTN 6XX/7XX Applicable to GTX 345 installations only.


This configuration is primarily for purposes
of displaying ADS-B In data and providing
HSDB ADS-B In Source: GTX GTN - Enabled [5] GPS data. However, it can also provide
altitude, heading, and radio altimeter data.
Refer to table C-3, table C-5, and table C-
6 for more information.
Configuration Module Garmin Altitude Encoder:
GAE N/A
Port Present
ACK Tech A-30 RS-232 N/A ALT FMT 1 25ft Mod 8 or higher.

ADC
B&D 90004-003 ARINC 429 N/A
(Speed: LOW)
ADC
KDC 281 ARINC 429 N/A
Honeywell (Bendix/ (Speed: LOW)
King) ADC
KDC 481 ARINC 429 N/A
(Speed: LOW)

Icarus Instruments 3000 RS-232 N/A ALT FMT 1 100ft

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page C-4
Interfacing Equipment GTX 3X5 Configuration
Manufacturer Model Data Format Notes
Configuration Setting
RS-232 N/A ALT FMT 1 25ft Either RS-232 or Gillham Gray Code
format can be used to provide altitude
Sandia SAE 5-35
Gillham Gray Code N/A Gillham Discretes ON data from the Sandia SAE 5-35 to the
GTX 3X5.
Applicable to installations with the 8800T
25ft or lower encoding ALT FMT 3 25ft
unit configured for 25ft or lower encoding.
8800T RS-232 Applicable to installations with the 8800T
100ft encoding ALT FMT 3 100ft unit configured for parallel Gray source or
100 ft encoding.
Shadin
F/ADC-200 RS-232 N/A ADC FMT 1

RS-232 N/A ADC FMT 1 Either the RS-232 or ARINC 429 data
F/ADC-2000 ADC format can be used for the Shadin F/ADC-
ARINC 429 N/A 2000 interface to the GTX (not both).
(Speed: LOW)

IA-RS232-X RS-232 N/A ALT FMT 1 100ft

Applicable to installations with the


25ft or lower encoding ALT FMT 1 25ft SSD120 unit configured for 25ft or lower
Trans-Cal Industries encoding.
SSD120 RS-232
Applicable to installations with the
100ft encoding ALT FMT 1 100ft SSD120 unit configured for parallel Gray
source or 100 ft encoding.

[1] Installation with no TIS traffic.


[2] Installation with TIS traffic (GTX 335 only).
[3] If GDU software v7.11 or later is used.
[4] For dual GTX installations, the GTX source ID must match the GDU 620 type number (e.g., GTX #1 to GTX ADS-B #1).
[5] To receive altitude data through HSDB, the Altitude Source must be configured to HSDB. Refer to section 6.1.5 for more details.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page C-5
C.4 Radar Altimeters

Table C-5 Radar Altimeters

Interfacing Equipment GTX 3X5 Configuration


Manufacturer Model Data Format Notes
Configuration Setting
Free Flight RA-4500 ARINC 429 N/A RADIO ALTITUDE

Honeywell (Bendix King) KRA 405B ARINC 429 N/A RADIO ALTITUDE

GRA 55/5500 ARINC 429 N/A RADIO ALTITUDE

Applicable to GTX 345


installations only.This
configuration can also
Traffic/ADS-B - Present provide heading and
GDU 620 HSDB [1] GDU - Enabled
Type: GTX ADS-B [2] altitude data, in addition to
radar altimeter data. Refer
to table C-4, and table C-6
for more information.

Garmin Applicable to GTX 345


installations only. This
configuration is primarily for
purposes of displaying
ADS-B In data and
providing GPS data.
GTN 6XX/7XX HSDB ADS-B In Source: GTX GTN - Enabled
However, it can also provide
altitude, heading, and radio
altimeter data. Refer to
table C-3, table C-4, and
table C-6 for more
information.

[1] If GDU software v7.11 or later is used.


[2] For dual GTX installations, the GTX source ID must match the GDU 620 type number (e.g., GTX #1 to GTX ADS-B #1).

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page C-6
C.5 Heading Source
Table C-6 Heading Source

Configuration Interfacing Equipment GTX 3X5


Manufacturer Model Notes
Parameter Configuration Configuration Setting
AHRS [2]
GRS 77 ARINC 429 N/A
(Speed: HIGH)

HEADING [1]
GAD 42 ARINC 429 N/A
(Speed: LOW)
This interface also provides altitude
EFIS AIR DATA [3]
ARINC 429 GENERAL PURPOSE 1 data. Refer to table C-4 for more
(Speed: HIGH)
information.

Applicable to GTX 345 installations


GDU 620 only. This configuration can also
Traffic/ADS-B - Present provide altitude and radio altimeter
HSDB [6] GDU - Enabled
Type: GTX ADS-B [7] data, in addition to heading. Refer to
table C-4 and table C-5 for more
information.
Garmin This configuration is primarily for
GTX Mode S+ [4] [8] REMOTE FMT 1 [4] purposes of transponder remote
RS-232 (or) (or) control. However, this configuration
GTX w/TIS+ [5] REMOTE FMT 2 [5] also provides magnetic heading. Refer
to table C-2 for more information.
Applicable to GTX 345 installations
GTN 6XX/7XX only. This configuration is primarily for
purposes of displaying ADS-B In data
and providing GPS data. However it
HSDB ADS-B In Source: GTX [8] GTN - Enabled
can also provide altitude, heading, and
radio altimeter data. Refer to table C-
3, table C-4, and table C-5 for more
information.
HEADING [1]
GNS 400W/500W ARINC 429 ARINC 429
(Speed: HIGH)

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page C-7
Configuration Interfacing Equipment GTX 3X5
Manufacturer Model Notes
Parameter Configuration Configuration Setting
HEADING [1]
Aspen EFD1000 ARINC 429
(Speed: LOW)

EXP5000 HEADING [1]


Avidyne ARINC 429
700-00006-() (Speed: LOW)

AHRS [2]
Collins AHC-85E ARINC 429
(Speed: HIGH)
N/A
EFIS 40/50 HEADING [1]
Honeywell (Bendix/King) ARINC 429
(SG 465) (Speed: LOW)

AHRS [2]
SN3500 ARINC 429
(Speed: LOW)
Sandel
AHRS [2]
SN3308 ARINC 429
(Speed: LOW)

[1] Heading information only.


[2] Attitude and heading information.
[3] Altitude, airspeed, altitude rate, and heading information.
[4] Installation with no TIS-A traffic.
[5] Installation with TIS-A traffic (GTX 335/335R ONLY).
[6] If GDU 620 software version 7.11 or later is used.
[7] For dual GTX installations, the GTX source ID must match the GDU 620 Type number (e.g., GTX #1 to GTX ADS-B #1).
[8] Refer to section 3.6.4 for a list of GTN heading inputs that will not be passed through the GTN to the GTX 345.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page C-8
C.6 Audio Panels

Table C-7 Audio Panels

Manufacturer Model Data Format GTX 3X5 Configuration Setting


SL10
SL10MS
SL10M
SL10S
SL15
Garmin
SL15M
GMA 35( )
GMA 340
GMA 347
GMA 350( )
KMA 24
KMA 24H-70/71
Honeywell (Bendix/King)
KMA 26 Analog Audio Audio: XPDR
KMA 28
PMA 6000
PS Engineering PMA 7000 Series
PMA 8000 Series

A710
Techinsonics
A711
Becker DVCS 6100

AMS 42
NAT AMS 44
AMS 50

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page C-9
C.7 Traffic and Weather Display

Table C-8 Traffic and Weather Display - GTX 345

Manufacturer Model Data Format Interface Config GTX 345 Config Notes
Applicable to GTX 345
GTN 6XX/7XX HSDB [4] ADS-B In Source: GTX GTN - Enabled
installations only.

Supports traffic only (also


ADSB TFC GNS includes GPS data from the
GNS 400W/500W).
RS-232 Supports both traffic and
weather (also includes GPS
ADSB TFC WX GNS
Garmin GNS 400W/500W [1] data from the GNS 400W/
500W).
Supports ADS-B traffic
ADSB TFC TRAFFIC
without TAS/TCAS.
ARINC 429
Supports ADS-B traffic w/
ADSB TFC w/TCAS TRAFFIC
TAS/TCAS correlation.
Traffic/ADS-B - Present
GDU 620 HSDB [2] [4] GDU - Enabled [5]
Type: GTX ADS-B [3]

[1] The GNS 400W/500W display of ADS-B in data requires the combination of one RS-232 and one ARINC 429 interface.
[2] If GDU 620 software version 7.11 or later is used.
[3] For Dual GTX installations, the GTX source ID must match the GDU 620 type number (e.g., GTX #1 to GTX ADS-B #1).
[4] For installations where the GTS 8X0 or GTS 8X5 traffic system is connected via HSDB to an interfacing display, the TAS/TCAS traffic data can be
transmitted to the GTX via HSDB when the GTX is configured: HSDB Interface >> GTS - Enabled.
[5] For installations that support TAS/TCAS, the GDU 620 INTERFACING SYSTEMS: + TAS/TCAS/TCAD must be set to “Present.” The following are
the proper TYPE that must be selected depending on the applicable traffic system called out in table C-10.
• Garmin GTS 800/820/850/825/855 - TYPE: GARMN GTS
• Avidyne Ryan TAS 600 (9900BX) - TYPE: TCAD
• L-3 Comm (SKY 497/SKY 899) - TYPE: A429 TAS/TCAS

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page C-10
Table C-9 Traffic Only Display - GTX 335

Manufacturer Model Data Format Interface Config GTX 335 Config Notes
Note that the primary
purpose of this
interface is for remote
control, however this
GTN 6XX/7XX RS-232 GTX w/TIS+ REMOTE FMT 2
format also includes
TIS-A data. Refer to
Garmin table C-2 for more
information.
GDU 620 ARINC 429 GTX 330 FORMAT 8

Does not include


GNS 400W/500W ARINC 429 GARMIN GTX 330 FORMAT 8
controls for GTX.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page C-11
C.8 Traffic Sensors (GTX 345 Only)

Table C-10 Traffic Sensors (GTX 345 Only)

GTX 345
Configuration GTX 345
Manufacturer Model Interfacing Equipment Configuration Configuration Notes
Parameter Input/Output
Setting
TRAFFIC 1
Input Traffic Display Destination (Primary TX) [1]
(Speed - HIGH)

Data format includes Garmin


Pressure Altitude Source (Primary RX);
TAS as well as Garmin
Magnetic Heading Source (Primary RX); GPS
FORMAT 5 concentrator. GTS 8X5
Output [2] Position/Velocity/Time Source (Primary RX);
GTS 8X0 (Speed - HIGH) system SW v2.10 or later is
Transponder 1 Communication (Primary RX)
Garmin (or) ARINC 429 required. GTS 8X0 system
[1]
GTS 8X5 SW v2.01 or later is required.
Select a GTS 8XX TX
channel that is NOT used
Transponder 1 Communication (Primary TX) [1]
N/A N/A because “Disabled” is not an
(Speed - HIGH)
option in the GTS 8XX Install
Tool.
SKY 497 TRAFFIC 2 Skywatch software v1.6 or
L3 Comm ARINC 429 Input N/A
SKY 899 (Speed - HIGH) later is required.
RYAN TAS Configuration setting
Avidyne 600 RS-232 Input/Output N/A TRAFFIC FMT 4 available on RS-232 Channel
(9900BX) 4 only.

[1] Configure the listed function(s) with the appropriate ARINC 429 channel based on the specific installation.
[2] ARINC 429 output from GTX 345 to GTS 800 is not required, but is required for all other GTS 8XX units.
C.9 Bluetooth

Table C-11 Bluetooth

Manufacturer Model Data Format Input/Output GTX 345 Config Notes


Garmin Internal Bluetooth N/A Bluetooth: Enabled

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page C-12
APPENDIX D ANTENNA LOCATIONS
GPS antennas mounted at a location detailed in this section meet ADS-B out integrity and accuracy
requirements of AC 20-165a. Flight check is not required, if GTX 3X5 uses GPS signal from antenna
mounted at one of these locations.
The list of rotorcraft makes and models for which GPS antenna location is defined in this section includes:
1. Airbus Helicopters models AS350B, AS350BA, AS350B2, AS350B3, and AS350D.
2. Augusta S.p.A models A109, A109A, A109 II, A109C, A109E, A109K2, A109S, AW109SP,
A119, and AW119 MKII.
3. Bell Helicopter Textron Canada model 206B.
4. Enstrom Helicopter models F-28, F-28A, F-28C, 280, 280C, 208F, 280FX, 480, and 480B.
5. Robinson Helicopter models R22, R22 ALPHA, R22 BETA, R22 MARINER, R44, R44 II, and
R66.

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page D-1
2 REF. GA 37 GPS ANTENNA
EXISTING

FS0.00
0
RBL
16.0 ±1.0
406.4 ±25.4

BL0.00
0

LBL
16.0 ±1.0
406.4 ±25.4

2 REF. GA 35 GPS ANTENNA

10867
FS 427.9
EXISTING
WL0.00
0
REF. 350A68-7247-00

FS 84.0 ±1.0

FS 85.0 ±1.0
BASE ANTENNA

2134 ±25

2159 ±25

0.171
EXISTING

2 REF. CI 2580-200
VHF/GPS ANTENNA
EXISTING
FS0.00
0

NOTES
1 DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES. DUAL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES AND MILLIMETERS. MILLIMETERS SHOWN IN BRACKETS.
2 DEPICTED ANTENNA LOCATIONS ILLUSTRATE ROTORCRAFT EXISTING GPS/SBASS ANTENNAS. ANTENNA MOUNTED AT THESE LOCATIONS MEET
ADS-B OUT INTEGRITY AND ACCURACY REQUIREMENTS OF AC 20-165A.
3 AIRBUS HELICOPTERS MODEL AS350B SHOWN. LOCATION OF GPS ANTENNA IN MODELS AS350B2, AS350B3, AS350BA, AND AS350D ARE SIMILAR.

Figure D-1 Airbus AS350 GPS Antenna Location

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page D-2
10167.29
REF. STA
400.29
2 REF. GA 36 GPS ANTENNA
EXISTING

2 REF. GA 37 GPS ANTENNA


EXISTING

REF. LA
127.76
3245

REF. 109-0370-03-103
FAIRING ASSEMBLY
EXISTING

NOTES
1 DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES. DUAL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES AND MILLIMETERS. MILLIMETERS SHOWN IN
BRACKETS.
2 DEPICTED ANTENNA LOCATIONS ILLUSTRATE ROTORCRAFT TYPE DESIGN DATA FOR EXISTING GPS/SBASS ANTENNAS.
ANTENNAS MOUNTED AT THESE LOCATIONS MEET ADS-B OUT INTEGRITY AND ACCURACY REQUIREMENTS OF AC 20-165A.
3 AUGUSTA MODEL 109 SHOWN. LOCATION OF GPS ANTENNA IN MODELS A109A, A109AII, A109C, A109E, A109K2, A109S,
AW109SP, A119, AND AW119MKII SIMILAR.

Figure D-2 August A109 GPS Antenna Location

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page D-3
RBL5.0
BL0.0

2 REF. GA 35 GPS ANTENNA


EXISTING

FS61.0

FS78.5
FS0.0

NOTES
1 DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.
2 DEPICTED ANTENNA LOCATION ILLUSTRATES ROTORCRAFT EXISTING GPS/SBASS ANTENNA.
ANTENNA MOUNTED AT THIS LOCATION MEETS ADS-B OUT INTEGRITY AND ACCURACY
REQUIREMENTS OF AC 20-165A.

Figure D-3 Bell 206B GPS Antenna Location

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page D-4
4.5
4.5
2 REF. GPS ANTENNA
STA 0.00 EXISTING

STA 100.00

STA 143.83

STA 213.00
NOTES
1 DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.
2 DEPICTED ANTENNA LOCATIONS ILLUSTRATES ROTORCRAFT TYPE DESIGN DATA FOR EXISTING GPS/SBASS ANTENNA.
ANTENNA MOUNTED AT THESE LOCATIONS MEETS ADS-B OUT INTEGRITY AND ACCURACY REQUIREMENTS OF AC 20-165A.
3 ENSTROM MODEL 280FX SHOWN. LOCATION OF GPS ANTENNA IN MODELS F-28, F-28A, F-28C, 280, 280C, AND 280F SIMILAR.

Figure D-4 Enstrom 280 GPS Antenna Location

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page D-5
4.5
4.5
2 REF. GPS ANTENNA
EXISTING
STA 0.00

STA 143.40

STA 191.34

STA 260.53
NOTES
1 DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.
2 DEPICTED ANTENNA LOCATIONS ILLUSTRATES ROTORCRAFT TYPE DESIGN DATA FOR EXISTING GPS/SBASS ANTENNA.
ANTENNA MOUNTED AT THESE LOCATIONS MEETS ADS-B OUT INTEGRITY AND ACCURACY REQUIREMENTS OF AC 20-165A.
3 ENSTROM MODEL 480 SHOWN. LOCATION OF GPS ANTENNA IN 480B SIMILAR.

Figure D-5 Enstrom 480 GPS Antenna Location

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page D-6
REF. FS100.0

REF. FS156.4
FS0.0
2 REF. GPS/COM ANTENNA
EXISTING

NOTES
1 DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.
2 DEPICTED ANTENNA LOCATION ILLUSTRATES ROTORCRAFT TYPE DESIGN DATA FOR EXISTING GPS/SBASS ANTENNA. ANTENNA
MOUNTED AT THIS LOCATION MEETS ADS-B OUT INTEGRITY AND ACCURACY REQUIREMENTS OF AC 20-165A.
3 ROBINSON MODEL R22 SHOWN. LOCATION OF GPS ANTENNA IN MODELS R22 ALPHA, R22 BETA, AND R22 MARINER SIMILAR.

Figure D-6 Robinson R22 GPS Antenna Location

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page D-7
REF. FS100.0

REF. FS121.5
REF. FS0.0

2 REF. GPS/COM ANTENNA


EXISTING

REF. WL0.00

NOTES
1 DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.
2 DEPICTED ANTENNA LOCATION ILLUSTRATES ROTORCRAFT TYPE DESIGN DATA FOR EXISTING GPS/SBASS ANTENNA.
ANTENNA MOUNTED AT THIS LOCATION MEETS ADS-B OUT INTEGRITY AND ACCURACY REQUIREMENTS OF AC 20-165A.
3 ROBINSON MODEL R44 SHOWN. LOCATION OF GPS ANTENNA IN MODEL R44 II SIMILAR.

Figure D-7 Robinson R44 GPS Antenna Location

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page D-8
REF. FS100.0

REF. FS158.8
REF. FS0.0

2 REF. GPS/COM ANTENNA


EXISTING

REF. WL0.0

NOTES
1 DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.
2 DEPICTED ANTENNA LOCATION ILLUSTRATES ROTORCRAFT TYPE DESIGN DATA FOR EXISTING GPS/SBASS ANTENNA.
ANTENNA MOUNTED AT THIS LOCATION MEETS ADS-B OUT INTEGRITY AND ACCURACY REQUIREMENTS OF AC 20-165A.

Figure D-8 Robinson R66 GPS Antenna Location

190-00734-20 GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual


Rev. 4 Page D-9

You might also like